Motorola Nextel i615 User Manual

Nextel  
iDEN  
Digital Multi-service Data-capable Phone  
i615 Phone User’s Guide  
@NNTN5959A@  
NNTN5959A  
Carrier.........................................................18  
Nextel® Customer Service ..............................19  
Understanding Status Messages ....................19  
Contents  
Getting Started........................................... 1  
Removing the Battery Door...............................2  
Locating Your SIM Card....................................3  
Battery...............................................................3  
Powering On and Off.........................................6  
Activating Service..............................................6  
Enabling Security ..............................................6  
Phone Programming .........................................7  
Making Calls .............................................20  
Phone Calls.....................................................20  
Nextel® Walkie-Talkie .....................................20  
Talkgroup Calls ...............................................25  
Receiving Calls ...............................................27  
Choosing a Number to Call .............................28  
Missed Phone Calls ........................................29  
Using Speakerphone.......................................29  
Using Mute......................................................30  
Making Emergency Phone Calls .....................30  
Finding Your Phone Number and Walkie-Talkie  
Number.........................................................7  
Nextel® Voicemail..............................................7  
Nextel Worldwide® Service ...............................7  
Customizing Features .......................................8  
Phone Basics ....................................................8  
SIM Card Security ...........................................13  
Locking the Keypad.........................................16  
Antenna...........................................................17  
Accessories.....................................................17  
Wireless Local Number Portability ..................18  
Bringing Your Phone Number From Another  
Call Alerts..................................................32  
Sending Call Alerts..........................................32  
Receiving Call Alerts .......................................32  
Using the Call Alert Queue..............................32  
Recent Calls..............................................34  
Calls and Call Alerts........................................34  
My Info From Other Phones............................34  
i
Contact Information From Other Phones ........35  
Viewing the Recent Calls List..........................35  
Storing Items to Contacts................................36  
Deleting Items .................................................36  
Making Calls From the Recent Calls List ........37  
Memo.........................................................50  
Call Forwarding ........................................51  
Forwarding All Calls ........................................51  
Turning Off Call Forwarding ............................51  
Forwarding Missed Calls.................................52  
Viewing Call Forwarding Settings ...................52  
Entering Text............................................ 38  
Using Word Mode............................................38  
Special Function Keys.....................................39  
Using Numeric Mode.......................................40  
Advanced Calling Features .....................53  
Call Waiting .....................................................53  
Switching Between Calls.................................53  
Putting a Call on Hold .....................................54  
Calling 2 People ..............................................54  
Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing.......55  
Making International Calls...............................55  
One Touch Walkie-Talkie................................55  
Call Timers......................................................56  
Using Your Phone as a Modem ......................57  
Features for the Hearing Impaired ..................58  
Making TTY Calls............................................58  
Special Dialing Codes .....................................60  
Contacts ................................................... 41  
Accessing Contacts.........................................42  
Creating Entries...............................................42  
Editing Entries .................................................44  
Viewing Entries................................................44  
Deleting Entries...............................................46  
Checking Capacity ..........................................47  
Creating Pauses and Waits.............................47  
International Numbers.....................................48  
Making Calls From Contacts ...........................48  
ii  
®
Retrieving Messages.......................................68  
Nextel Phone Services.......................... 61  
Caller ID ..........................................................61  
Per-Call Blocking.............................................61  
Per-Line Blocking ............................................61  
Second Line Service .......................................61  
Call Restrictions ..............................................62  
Sprint 411........................................................62  
Voicemail Messages ................................69  
Receiving a Message......................................69  
Accessing Voicemail From  
the Message Center ...................................69  
Sending Unanswered Calls to Voicemail ........69  
®
Nextel Voicemail.....................................70  
Ring Tones ............................................... 63  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.........................63  
Ring and Vibrate..............................................64  
Assigning Ring Tones to Contacts ..................64  
Viewing Ring Tone Assignments.....................64  
Downloading More Ring Tones.......................65  
Managing Memory...........................................65  
Deleting Custom Ring Tones ..........................65  
Setting Up Your Voicemail Box .......................70  
Playing Messages ...........................................70  
Changing Your Password ...............................71  
Recording Your Name.....................................71  
Recording Your Active Greeting......................72  
Advanced Voicemail Features ........................72  
Multimedia Messages ..............................75  
Navigating the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items..75  
Creating and Sending Messages ....................75  
Drafts...............................................................84  
Sent Items .......................................................85  
Receiving a Message......................................86  
Navigating a Message.....................................86  
Viewing Received Messages  
Message Center ....................................... 66  
Accessing the Message Center.......................66  
Message Center Options.................................66  
Receiving Messages................................ 67  
Message Notifications .....................................67  
iii  
SM  
From the Message Center..........................87  
Actions for Received Messages......................88  
Customizing MMS ...........................................91  
Managing Memory...........................................94  
Using Nextel Direct Send ..................106  
Sending a Picture..........................................106  
Receiving a Picture .......................................107  
Sending My Info and Contact Information.....108  
SMS Messages......................................... 95  
My Info.....................................................111  
Viewing My Info.............................................111  
Editing My Info ..............................................111  
Setting Sending Options ...............................112  
Wireless Data Services ........................... 97  
Wireless Data Services ...................................97  
Accessing Wireless Data Services From Your  
Phone .........................................................97  
®
Bluetooth ..............................................113  
Understanding Bluetooth® Access Settings..113  
Setting Your Phone for Bluetooth®................113  
Accessing Bluetooth® ...................................114  
Making a Bluetooth® Connection ..................115  
Setting Device Details ...................................117  
Navigation Keys ..............................................98  
Guides and Demos..........................................99  
Media Center .......................................... 100  
Viewing the Media Center .............................100  
Forward Locked Items...................................101  
Pictures .........................................................102  
Audio Recordings..........................................103  
Renaming Items ............................................104  
Locking Items ................................................104  
Deleting Items ...............................................104  
Managing Memory.........................................105  
Sending Contacts, Datebook Events and  
Pictures.....................................................118  
Receiving Items.............................................119  
Voice Records ........................................121  
Viewing Voice Records .................................121  
Creating Voice Records ................................121  
Playing Voice Records ..................................122  
iv  
Labeling Voice Records ................................122  
Locking Voice Records..................................122  
Deleting Voice Records.................................123  
Managing Memory.........................................123  
Setting Privacy Options.................................136  
Using GPS With Map Software .....................137  
Datebook .................................................139  
Viewing Datebook .........................................139  
Creating Events.............................................140  
Editing Events ...............................................142  
Deleting Events .............................................142  
Receiving Reminders ....................................143  
Java Applications .................................. 124  
Installing Applications....................................124  
Running Applications.....................................124  
Suspending Applications...............................124  
Resuming Applications..................................125  
Ending Applications.......................................125  
Downloading Applications .............................125  
Deleting Applications.....................................125  
Managing Memory.........................................126  
Shortcuts on the Main Menu .........................126  
Java Applications and GPS Enabled.............127  
Making Calls From Datebook and Datebook  
Reminders ................................................143  
Customizing Datebook Setup........................144  
Customizing Your Phone.......................146  
Setting the Volume........................................146  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.......................146  
Changing the Look of Your Phone ................146  
Temporarily Turning Off Transmissions ........149  
Using Settings ...............................................149  
GPS Enabled .......................................... 130  
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind ..........130  
Making an Emergency Call ...........................132  
Viewing Your Approximate Location .............133  
Enhancing GPS Performance .......................134  
Updating Satellite Almanac Data...................135  
Profiles ....................................................154  
Viewing Profiles.............................................154  
Switching Profiles..........................................154  
How Changing Settings Affects Profiles........154  
v
Temporary Profiles........................................155  
Creating Profiles............................................156  
Editing Profiles ..............................................156  
Deleting Profiles ............................................156  
Setting Call Filtering ......................................157  
Nextel National Network General Terms  
and Conditions....................................165  
Safety and General Information ............187  
RF Operational Characteristics .....................187  
Portable Radio Product Operation and EME  
Exposure...................................................187  
Shortcuts................................................ 159  
Creating a Shortcut .......................................159  
Using a Shortcut............................................159  
Editing a Shortcut..........................................160  
Deleting Shortcuts.........................................160  
Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility...190  
Medical Devices ............................................190  
Operational Warnings ...................................191  
Operational Cautions ....................................192  
Accessory Safety Information .......................193  
Using a Headset..................................... 161  
Using a Bluetooth Headset............................161  
Attaching a Headset......................................161  
Using a Remote Walkie-Talkie Button...........161  
Hearing Aid Compatibility .....................195  
Caring for the Environment  
by Recycling........................................196  
Disposal of Your Mobile Telephone and  
®
Accessories ..............................................196  
Nextel Customer Service .................... 163  
Domestic Customer Service..........................163  
Nextel Worldwide® Customer Service...........164  
MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY .......197  
Patent and Software Provisions ....................200  
vi  
Limited Warranty  
Motorola Communication Products  
(International) ..................................... 202  
Index ....................................................... 206  
vii  
Note: This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)  
Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc.  
Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard  
Plantation, FL 33322 USA  
Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920  
If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is  
Hereby declares that the product:  
Product Name: i615  
encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Model Number: H58XAN6RR4BN  
Conforms to the following regulations:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a),  
15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Class B Digital Device  
As a personal computer peripheral, this device  
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation  
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on  
a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/TV technician for help.  
viii  
Getting Started  
retractable  
antenna  
earpiece  
status light  
display  
p
Power button.  
Navigation key — press the arrows to  
scroll through menus and lists.  
volume  
controls  
stereo  
headset  
jack  
OK key — selects highlighted items;  
answers calls.  
O
m
A
Walkie-Talkie  
button  
Menu key — accesses context-sensitive  
menus.  
Option key — selects the option  
appearing above it on the display.  
option keys  
menu key  
Note: Throughout this User’s Guide,  
the option keys will be  
power button  
represented by A.  
light sensor  
back key  
s
e
Send key — places phone calls.  
microphone  
End key — ends phone calls; returns to  
idle screen; in Wireless Data Services,  
returns to home page.  
accessory  
connector  
speaker  
(in back)  
1
           
Getting Started  
Removing the Battery Door  
1 Make sure the phone is powered off. See  
“Powering On and Off” on page 6.  
2 Slide the release button back.  
t
.
3 Gripping the battery door near the release  
button, lift the battery door and remove it from  
the back of your phone.  
t
.
Turns Walkie-Talkie speaker on and off;  
used with voice names and voice records.  
Ends calls; sends incoming phone calls to  
voicemail.  
Grip  
here.  
release  
button  
Status Indicates the status of your connection.  
light  
Solid green means your phone is in use;  
flashing green means your phone is ready  
to use; solid red means no service;  
flashing red means your phone is signing  
on to the network.  
To start using your i615 phone:  
Make sure your SIM card is in place.  
Charge the battery.  
Activate your service.  
Enable security.  
2
       
Locating Your SIM Card  
Locating Your SIM Card  
Battery  
Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a  
small piece of plastic located in the SIM card  
holder in the back of your phone, underneath the  
battery.  
Inserting the Battery  
Your phone comes with a Maximum Capacity  
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) Battery.  
1 Remove the battery door.  
2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area.  
Press the bottom of the battery to secure it.  
SIM card  
SIM card  
holder  
3 Replace the battery door and press it gently until  
you hear a click.  
If there is no SIM card in your phone, contact  
Nextel Customer Service at 1-800-639-6111.  
If you want to use a SIM card other than the one  
that is in your phone, please contact Nextel  
Customer Service to verify that the SIM card you  
want to use is compatible with your phone.  
3
         
Getting Started  
Charger Attached or Device Attached appears  
Charging the Battery  
Your phone comes with a rapid travel charger.  
on the display.  
Tip: To remove the charger from the accessory  
connector: Press the buttons on the sides  
of the plug. Pull the plug straight out.  
1 Plug the charger into an electrical outlet.  
2 Open the connector cover.  
4 If you have purchased optional batteries or  
chargers, see “Charging Times”.  
connector  
cover  
Charging Times  
Check your battery and charger type against the  
grid below to determine appropriate charging  
times.  
Battery  
Charger  
Rapid  
3 Plug the other end of the charger into the  
accessory connector.  
Standard  
5.5 hours  
Standard  
Li-Ion  
2 hours  
Maximum  
Capacity  
Li-Ion  
3.5 hours  
9 hours  
For best results, charge the batteries within the  
temperature range of 50°F to 104°F (10°C to  
40°C).  
Prolonged charging is not recommended.  
4
   
Battery  
The battery capacity is degraded if the battery is  
stored for long periods while fully charged. If  
long term storage is required, store at half  
capacity.  
Removing the Battery  
1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery  
door.  
2 Remove the battery by pushing it toward the  
antenna and lifting it out.  
Sleep Mode  
To conserve battery supply, your phone uses  
Sleep mode. With Sleep mode, after your phone  
has been idle for a specified interval, the display on  
your phone will turn off.  
You can set your phone to enter Sleep mode after  
1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 15 minutes of  
inactivity. See “Display/Info Features” on page 150.  
Sleep mode turns off when you either press a key  
or receive a call alert or phone call.  
Battery Use and Maintenance  
The Motorola iDEN Approved chargers provide  
optimum performance. Other chargers may not  
fully charge the iDEN battery or may yield a  
reduced number of lifetime charge cycles.  
Holster  
When you place your i615 phone in the holster that  
you received with your phone, your phone will go  
into Sleep mode to preserve the phone’s battery  
life. The holster contains a magnet that activates  
Sleep mode on your phone.  
Extreme temperatures degrade battery  
performance. Do not store the battery where  
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C) or fall below  
-4°F (-20°C).  
Note: Maintain a minimum distance of 1/4 inch  
between the magnet and any media that  
contains digital information, such as credit  
cards, debit cards, etc., as this digital  
information could be erased by the  
magnet.  
Batteries have a self discharge rate and without  
use, lose about 1% of their charge per day.  
5
     
Getting Started  
Powering On and Off  
To power your phone on, press p.  
Activating Service  
The first time you power your phone on, your  
service is activated.  
Note: When powering on, if you press p for  
more than 5 seconds, you will turn off  
calls and other transmissions. See  
Temporarily Turning Off Transmissions”  
on page 149.  
A screen then appears prompting you to select Ok  
to update your browser information, which enables  
security. This screen will only appear during initial  
activation.  
As your phone connects to the network, you will  
see a connecting message. When the idle screen  
appears, the phone is ready to use.  
Enabling Security  
You must enable security the first time you power  
on your phone or within 10 days of first activation of  
your phone.  
1 Press A under Ok.  
Note: If you press A under Later, the idle  
screen will appear. The next time you  
select Net from the main menu, you will  
be prompted to enable security before you  
can use Wireless Data Services.  
2 You are prompted to enable security. Press A  
under Yes. A series of screens followed by the  
default homepage displays.  
3 Press e to return to the idle screen.  
To power your phone off, press and hold p.  
6
               
Phone Programming  
4 Scroll to see your information:  
Phone Programming  
Line 1 and Line 2 are your phone numbers.  
Walkie-Talkie is your Walkie-Talkie number, the  
number that others use to contact you using  
Nextel® Walkie-Talkie service. These numbers  
appear when you receive your alert notification  
after enabling security on your phone.  
Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will  
receive an alert notification containing your  
Personal Telephone Number (PTN), Nextel  
Customer Service number, Walkie-Talkie, and  
Talkgroups (if you subscribe to this service).  
1 When you receive an alert notification saying  
New Browser Message - Receive  
Programming Info, press A under Goto.  
See “My Info” on page 111 for more information  
about this feature.  
2 You are prompted to accept changes to your  
lists. Press A under Ok.  
Nextel® Voicemail  
You must set up your voicemail box before you can  
retrieve messages. See “Setting Up Your  
Voicemail Box” on page 70.  
3 You are prompted again to accept changes to  
your lists. Press A under Ok.  
4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under  
Ok.  
5 Press e to return to the idle screen.  
Nextel Worldwide® Service  
You can use your phone to make calls  
internationally in select cities using other iDEN®  
networks by calling Nextel Customer Service to  
activate international dialing on your account.  
Countries in which you can use your phone include  
Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Guam, Israel, Jordan,  
Mexico, Peru, the Philippines, Singapore, and  
South Korea*.  
Finding Your Phone Number  
and Walkie-Talkie Number  
My Info lets you view your phone number,  
Walkie-Talkie number, and other phone  
information.  
1 Press m to access the main menu.  
2 Scroll to My Info.  
* Credit approval may be required. Other conditions may apply.  
3 Press O.  
7
           
Getting Started  
Customizing Features  
Phone Basics  
You can control many features of your phone,  
including the size of the text on the display, the way  
you access main menu items, and the volume of  
incoming sound, rings, and other tones. See  
“Customizing Your Phone” on page 146.  
Display  
Any time your phone is powered on, the display  
provides you with information and options.  
status icons  
text area  
menu icon  
display options  
The screen shown above is the idle screen. The  
idle screen appears when your phone is on, but not  
engaged in any activity.  
Note: The idle screen will not display if your  
phone is in Sleep mode.  
8
         
Phone Basics  
Text Area  
Quick Access to Main Menu Items  
This area displays menus, messages, names,  
phone numbers, and other information.  
Each arrow in the navigation key and O can be  
used to access a main menu item from the idle  
screen. Each of these keys is assigned to a main  
menu item when you receive your phone. To  
assign different main menu items, see “Personalize  
Features” on page 151.  
Display Options  
Two display options appear at the bottom of most  
screens. You select a display option by pressing  
the option key below it.  
OK Key  
Menus and Lists  
Pressing O:  
Your phone’s features are arranged in menus,  
submenus, and lists.  
Selects the highlighted menu item or list item.  
Sets options.  
To access the items in a menu or list, scroll using  
the navigation key at the top of your keypad. This  
key lets you scroll up, down, left, or right. Holding  
down the appropriate part of the navigation key  
speeds up scrolling.  
Confirms actions.  
Places and answer calls.  
From the idle screen, accesses Settings. This is  
the default setting. You can assign a different  
main menu item to O.  
In this guide, this symbol > tells you to select a  
menu or list item. For example, Settings >  
Security means:  
Menu Key  
Many features provide context-sensitive menus  
that let you access related features and actions.  
This icon S appears any time a context-sensitive  
menu is available. Press m to access the menu.  
1 Scroll to Settings on the main menu.  
2 Press O to see the Settings screen.  
3 Scroll to Security.  
4 Press O to see the Security screen.  
9
         
Getting Started  
Main Menu  
n
Downloads  
Provides a catalog of ring  
tones, wallpapers, games  
and Java applications that  
you can download directly  
to your phone. Items in this  
catalog change frequently,  
so check regularly for fresh  
content. See page 65.  
All your phone’s features can be accessed through  
the main menu. You can set the main menu to  
appear as a list or as large icons. See “Setting the  
Menu View” on page 148.  
Net  
Access Nextel Wireless  
Data Services. See  
page 97.  
a
Bluetooth  
GPS  
Connect to a device with  
Bluetooth. See page 113.  
B
Java Apps  
Settings  
Java applications on your  
phone. See page 124.  
q
b
m
c
j
Find your approximate  
geographical location. See  
page 130.  
l
Customize your phone.  
See page 146.  
Contacts  
Create, view, store, and  
edit Contacts and Groups.  
See page 41.  
d
Ring Tones  
VoiceRecord  
My Info  
Assign ring tones and turn  
ringer off. See page 63.  
Record and play audio  
messages. See page 121.  
Messages  
Call Forward  
Datebook  
Memo  
Access messages. See  
page 66.  
e
f
o
g
Access personal phone  
information, including  
phone number and  
Walkie-Talkie. See  
page 111.  
Set call forwarding options.  
See page 51.  
Schedule appointments.  
See page 139.  
Store a number to access  
later. See page 50.  
10  
   
Phone Basics  
Status Icons  
Call Timers  
Recent Calls  
Shortcuts  
Profiles  
Phone usage information.  
See page 56.  
h
i
s
p
Status icons appear at the top of the display. Some  
appear at all times. Others appear only when your  
phone is engaged in certain activities or when you  
have activated certain features.  
Lists recent calls. See  
page 34.  
Create shortcuts to  
screens. See page 159.  
Battery Strength — A fuller battery  
indicates a greater charge.  
abcd  
efgd  
Groups of settings you  
apply together. See  
page 154.  
Signal Strength — More bars next  
to the antenna indicate a stronger  
signal.  
opqr  
s
Call Alert  
Lists call alerts. See  
page 32.  
k
Phone In Use — Your phone is  
A
B
m
Media Center  
Access stored pictures and  
audio recordings. See  
page 100.  
active on a phone call.  
Walkie-Talkie In Use — Your  
phone is active on a Walkie-Talkie  
call.  
Talkgroup In Use — Your phone is  
active on a Talkgroup call.  
C
S
Group In Use— Your phone is  
active on a Group Walkie-Talkie  
call.  
11  
   
Getting Started  
B
Bluetooth In Use — Your phone is  
Internet — You are ready to  
browse the internet or are browsing  
the internet using a secure  
connection.  
DE  
using Bluetooth. If this icon is  
blinking, then your phone is in  
discoverable mode. If this icon is  
static, your phone is active in a  
Bluetooth connection.  
Voice Record — You have one or  
more voice records stored. See  
page 121.  
c
Active Phone Line — 1 indicates  
phone line 1 is ready to make calls;  
2 indicates phone line 2 is ready to  
make calls.  
1 2  
Transmitters — Your phone is set  
not to receive calls and other  
transmissions. See “Temporarily  
Turning Off Transmissions” on page  
149.  
U
Call Forward — Your phone is set  
to forward calls. See “Call  
Forwarding” on page 51.  
G L  
I J  
H K  
Packet Data — You are ready to  
transfer packet data or are  
transferring packet data. See “Using  
Your Phone as a Modem” on page  
57.  
Y Z  
Ringer Off — Your phone is set to  
not ring. See “Setting Your Phone to  
Vibrate” on page 63.  
QRM  
Speaker Off — Walkie-Talkie and  
Group Walkie-Talkie sounds are set  
to come through the earpiece rather  
than through the speaker.  
u
TTY — You are ready to use your  
phone to make calls using a  
teletypewriter device. See “Making  
TTY Calls” on page 58.  
N O  
Messages — You have one or  
more messages. See page 66.  
wxT  
yz  
T9 Text Input — You are using T9  
Text Input to enter text. See  
“Entering Text” on page 37.  
ljik  
mXnW  
12  
   
SIM Card Security  
Note: If a SIM PIN is required, your phone will  
not function until the SIM PIN is entered,  
except for making emergency calls.  
SIM Card Security  
Your SIM card stores all your Contacts and  
protects your personal information. Since this  
information is stored on your SIM card, not in your  
phone, you can remove the information by  
removing your SIM card.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > SIM PIN.  
2 Select On or Off.  
3 Enter the current SIM PIN.  
Note: Except for making emergency calls, your  
phone will not function without the SIM  
card.  
Note: The default SIM PIN is 0000. Change your  
PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM  
card (see “Changing the PIN” on page  
14).  
To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your  
SIM card is protected by a PIN that you enter each  
time the phone is powered on. You can change the  
PIN or turn off the requirement that it be entered.  
4 Press A under Ok.  
Entering the PIN  
1 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears  
after you power on your phone, enter your SIM  
PIN.  
Turning the PIN Requirement On and  
Off  
When the SIM PIN requirement is off, your phone  
can be used without entering a PIN.  
2 Press A under Ok.  
The message SIM Unlocked displays.  
Important: When the SIM PIN requirement is off,  
the personal data on your SIM card is  
not protected. Anyone can use your  
Important: If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times,  
your SIM card is blocked. To unblock  
your SIM card, you must contact Nextel  
Customer Service. See “Unblocking the  
PIN” on page 14.  
phone and access your personal data.  
When the SIM PIN requirement is on, you are  
prompted to enter your PIN each time you power  
on your phone.  
13  
         
Getting Started  
Important: If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK  
code 10 times, your SIM card is  
permanently blocked and must be  
replaced. If this happens, all data is  
lost. You will get a message to contact  
Nextel Customer Service. Except for  
making emergency calls, your phone  
will not function with a blocked SIM  
card.  
Changing the PIN  
Note: The SIM PIN requirement must be turned  
on in order to access this feature.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Change Passwords > SIM PIN.  
2 At the Enter Old SIM PIN screen, enter the  
current SIM PIN.  
3 Press A under Ok.  
4 At the Enter New SIM PIN screen, enter the  
new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN.  
To unblock the PIN:  
1 Press * # m 1.  
5 Press A under Ok.  
6 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN screen, re-enter  
the new SIM PIN to confirm.  
2 At your Nextel Customer Service  
representative’s request, provide the information  
needed to give you a PUK code.  
3 Select Unblock PIN.  
7 Press A under Ok.  
4 Enter the PUK code.  
5 Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN.  
6 Re-enter your SIM PIN.  
Changed: SIM PIN displays.  
Unblocking the PIN  
If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM  
card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you  
must contact Nextel Customer Service to get a PIN  
Unblock Code (PUK).  
Note: These steps must be performed in quick  
succession.  
If you entered the codes properly, SIM Unlocked  
appears on the display.  
14  
         
SIM Card Security  
Datebook events  
Inserting and Removing Your SIM  
Card  
Options set using the Personalize menu  
Information stored in Memo  
Important: Do not touch the gold-colored areas of  
your SIM card.  
3 most recent GPS Enabled locations  
The SIM card is designed for optimal Contacts  
storage and feature use. For Nextel SIM card  
compatibility information, visit www.sprint.com.  
Inserting Your SIM Card  
1 With your phone powered off, remove the  
battery door and battery.  
2 Hold your SIM card as shown. Do not touch the  
gold-colored area.  
Note: In some cases, Contacts and Groups may  
not be accessible if you move your SIM  
card to another phone. Contacts and  
Groups created with your i615 phone may  
not be readable by an older iDEN  
SIM-based phone.  
cut corner  
If you remove your SIM card and use it with  
another phone, or use another SIM card with your  
phone, the following information is erased:  
The recent calls list  
Call forwarding settings  
Net alerts  
MMS messages  
Options set using the MMS Setup menu  
Pictures and audio recordings in the media  
center, except those that are forward locked  
Voice records  
Voice names  
15  
   
Getting Started  
3 Carefully slide your SIM card into your phone,  
until it lies flat in the SIM card holder.  
2 While holding the tab down, slide your SIM card  
out of the SIM card holder.  
SIM card  
holder  
SIM card  
holder  
Removing Your SIM Card  
Note: Protect your SIM card as you would any  
Important: To avoid loss or damage, do not remove  
your SIM card from your phone unless  
absolutely necessary.  
delicate object. Store it carefully.  
Locking the Keypad  
Locking the phone’s keypad prevents its buttons  
from being pressed. When the keypad is locked,  
you can only:  
1 With your phone powered off, remove the  
battery door and battery.  
Power the phone on and off  
Unlock the keypad  
Respond to incoming calls, messages, and  
alerts  
Important: Emergency calls cannot be placed while  
the keypad is locked.  
16  
     
Antenna  
To lock or unlock the keypad:  
Antenna  
1 From the idle screen, press m.  
The retractable antenna on your i615 phone is  
designed to be extended during calls and is  
essential to attain the hearing aid compatibility  
rating on applicable models.  
2 Press *.  
If you press a key while the keypad is locked,  
instructions for unlocking the keypad display  
briefly.  
To extend the antenna, pull gently on the rounded  
tip until the antenna is fully extended and clicks into  
position.  
You also have the option of setting your phone to  
automatically lock the keypad if there has been no  
activity for a specified time.  
When finished with a call, retract the antenna by  
pushing gently on the rounded tip until the antenna  
clicks into place.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Keypad Lock.  
2 To lock the keypad immediately, select Lock  
Now. You will be given the option to press m  
and * to lock and unlock the keypad.  
To optimize your phone’s performance, extend the  
antenna when you make or receive a call, and  
avoid touching the antenna with any body part.  
3 To set a specific time for the keypad to lock if  
there has been no activity, select Auto Lock and  
then select a time.  
Important: Failure to fully extend or retract the  
antenna until the antenna clicks into  
place causes severely degraded  
performance, which may result in  
missed calls, dropped calls, or garbled  
audio.  
The keypad can be set to lock in 5, 10, 15, or 20  
minutes if the keypad is not touched during the  
specified time. To turn the auto lock off, repeat  
step 3 and select Off.  
Accessories  
Your phone comes with a Maximum Capacity  
Li-Ion Battery, rapid travel charger, and holster.  
17  
         
Getting Started  
Note: When you place your i615 phone into the  
holster, your phone goes into Sleep  
mode.  
automatically. You will receive a text message on  
your phone letting you know that activation is  
complete. Simply turn your phone off and back on  
again to complete activation.  
Various accessories are available for use with your  
Here is additional information you need to be  
aware of until the number you have brought to  
Nextel is active on the Nextel® National Network:  
i615 phone, including cases, vehicle power  
chargers, data cables, hands-free accessories,  
Bluetooth accessories, and more.  
Nextel® Voicemail  
To order additional accessories, go to  
www.sprint.com or call 1-800-Nextel6. You can  
also contact your Nextel Authorized Sales  
Representative or stop by any Sprint Store. For  
information on Sprint Store locations, go to  
www.sprint.com.  
We suggest you set up your voicemail box after the  
number you brought to Nextel is active on your  
Nextel phone and your temporary phone number is  
deactivated. If you set up your voicemail box prior  
to this, all messages and all settings (including  
your greeting and password) will be lost when the  
number you have brought to Nextel becomes  
active.  
Wireless Local Number  
Portability  
Text Messaging  
During the activation process, it is possible that text  
messages may not be properly routed to your  
phone.  
Bringing Your Phone Number From  
Another Carrier  
If you are bringing your phone number from  
another carrier, your new phone will be active as  
soon as you receive it. Nextel will provide you with  
a temporary phone number so that you can begin  
using your phone immediately. Once the number  
you have brought to Nextel is activated, your  
temporary phone number will be deactivated and  
service with your previous carrier will be cancelled  
18  
   
Nextel® Customer Service  
911 Calls  
Understanding Status  
Nextel continues to make efforts to ensure that all  
911 calls are minimally impacted by this process. If  
you make a call to 911 from your temporary phone  
number and the call fails, the 911 emergency  
response center will not be able to call you back on  
your Nextel phone if in the meantime your Nextel  
phone has been programmed with your permanent  
phone number. As with any wireless 911 call, if  
your call is disconnected before location and  
details have been provided, be sure to call 911  
again and advise that you were disconnected.  
Messages  
You may receive status messages under certain  
conditions. Before contacting Nextel Customer  
Service, note the message, numeric code, and the  
conditions under which the message appeared.  
You can go to www.sprint.com for additional  
information about status messages.  
Go to www.sprint.com/bringyournumber for more  
details.  
Nextel® Customer Service  
Nextel Customer Service: 1-800-639-6111 or dial  
611 from your i615 phone.  
Nextel Worldwide Customer Service:  
+1-360-662-5202 (toll-free from your i615 phone).  
19  
       
Group Walkie-Talkie — allows nationwide  
Walkie-Talkie calling to up to 20 Nextel users  
simultaneously. (See “Nextel® Group  
Walkie-Talkie” on page 21).  
Making Calls  
Your i615 phone makes two types of calls: digital  
cellular phone calls and Walkie-Talkie calls.  
Talkgroups — allows Walkie-Talkie calling to up  
to 100 Nextel users in the same Walkie-Talkie  
network.  
Phone Calls  
1 Enter the number you want to call.  
2 To place the call:  
See www.sprint.com for more details on these  
Walkie-Talkie services. Pricing for each of these  
services is based on your service contract.  
Press s. -or-  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call:  
If you entered the number from the idle screen,  
press O.  
1 Enter the Walkie-Talkie number you want to call.  
3 To end the call, press e.  
2 Press and hold the Walkie-Talkie button on the  
side of your phone. Begin talking after your  
phone emits a chirping sound.  
Nextel® Walkie-Talkie  
Nextel offers the following Walkie-Talkie services:  
3 Release the Walkie-Talkie button to listen.  
A Walkie-Talkie call ends automatically if there is  
no activity on the call for a few seconds.  
Local Walkie-Talkie — allows Walkie-Talkie  
calling within your local coverage area.  
Tip: To let someone know you want to talk to  
him or her on a Walkie-Talkie call, send a  
call alert. See “Call Alerts” on page 32.  
Nationwide Walkie-Talkie — allows  
coast-to-coast Walkie-Talkie calling to Nextel  
users to and from anywhere on the Nextel  
National Network (U. S.).  
International Walkie-Talkie — allows  
Walkie-Talkie calling to and from select  
countries.  
20  
         
Nextel® Walkie-Talkie  
Note: In order to store Groups to your i615, you  
must use the 128K SIM card that came  
with your phone. The 128K SIM card is  
labeled “Nextel 600 Contcs & 25 Grps”.  
With this SIM card, a maximum of 25  
groups can be added to your i615. Group  
entries created with your i615 phone may  
not be readable by older iDEN SIM-based  
phones.  
Dialing Walkie-Talkie Numbers  
Every Walkie-Talkie number has 3 parts — an area  
ID, a network ID, and a member ID — with an  
asterisk between each of these parts. For example:  
999*999*9999.  
When you place a Walkie-Talkie call, you must  
enter the whole Walkie-Talkie number including the  
asterisks.  
Tip: When you store a Walkie-Talkie number in  
Contacts, it is good practice to include the  
whole Walkie-Talkie number, including the  
asterisks.  
Group  
S
Talkgroup  
Group Icons  
Geography  
I
Nextel® Group Walkie-Talkie  
A Group Walkie-Talkie call is similar to a  
Walkie-Talkie call to one user, but is made to  
multiple Walkie-Talkie users at once. You can  
create Groups from your phone and call up to 20  
Nextel users anywhere on the Nextel National  
Network to other Group Walkie-Talkie-compatible  
phones*. You can create a Group for one-time use  
or store it to Contacts so you can call it at any time.  
Nationwide  
Limited to local  
market and  
network (fleet)  
Maximum  
Group Size  
21 (including  
originator)  
100  
Set-up  
Dynamically,  
via your phone Sprint  
Predefined, via  
administrator  
using Talkgroup  
Management  
* Not all phones are Group Walkie-Talkie-compatible. See  
www.sprint.com for more details on Group Walkie-Talkie.  
Voice  
Yes  
No  
Activated  
Dialing  
21  
   
Making Calls  
To add Group members from Contacts, the recent  
calls list, or Memo:  
Creating Groups in Contacts  
1 From the main menu, select Contacts.  
2 Select [New Group].  
3 If you want to assign a name to the Group, enter  
the name.  
1 While creating a Group, select [Add Member].  
-or-  
Select [Add Number] and press A under  
Browse.  
Note: If you do not assign a name, the Group is  
named “Group” followed by the number of  
members in the Group. For example,  
Note: To move between Contacts, the recent  
calls list, and Memo, scroll left or right, or  
press * or #.  
“Group (8)” for a group with 8 members.  
2 Scroll to the members you want from Contacts,  
the recent calls list, or Memo and press O. A  
checkmark appears next to each selected  
member.  
4 Add Group members. See “Adding Group  
Members”.  
5 If you want to create a voice name for the  
Group, select [Options] > Voice Name. As  
directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat  
the voice name you want to assign to the Group.  
Speak clearly into the microphone.  
Note: To deselect a member, scroll to a selected  
member and press O.  
3 Press A under Done.  
6 Press A under Save.  
To add Group members manually from the keypad:  
1 While creating a Group, select [Add Number].  
2 Enter the Walkie-Talkie number using the  
keypad.  
Adding Group Members  
You can add Group members that have a  
Walkie-Talkie number and Group  
Walkie-Talkie-compatible phone to your Group by  
selecting them from Contacts, the recent calls list,  
memo, or by manually entering the Walkie-Talkie  
number from your keypad. You can also add all  
members in an existing Group to another Group by  
selecting the Group name from Contacts.  
3 Press O.  
Making Group Walkie-Talkie Calls  
1 From Contacts or the recent calls list, scroll to or  
select the Group you want. -or-  
22  
       
Nextel® Walkie-Talkie  
Press and hold t until a prompt appears telling  
you to say the voice name. Say the voice name  
assigned to the Group you want. -or-  
From the recent calls list, scroll to an entry  
containing the Walkie-Talkie number.  
2 Press m.  
Enter or select a Walkie-Talkie number and add  
more Walkie-Talkie numbers. See “Starting a  
Group Walkie-Talkie Call With a Walkie-Talkie  
Number” on page 23.  
3 Select Call New Group.  
4 Add more Group members. See “Adding Group  
Members” on page 22.  
5 If you want to save the Group you have created:  
Press m. Select Store Group. -or-  
2 Press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
If you do not want to save the Group, press A  
Receiving Group Walkie-Talkie Calls  
To answer a Group Walkie-Talkie call:  
under Done.  
6 To make the call, press the Walkie-Talkie  
button.  
Proceed as if answering a Walkie-Talkie call.  
Only one person at a time may speak on a  
Group Walkie-Talkie call.  
Removing Members or Groups  
To remove a member from a Group:  
Starting a Group Walkie-Talkie Call  
With a Walkie-Talkie Number  
You can start a Group Walkie-Talkie call with any  
Walkie-Talkie number you want to call.  
1 From Contacts, scroll to the group you want to  
delete the member from.  
2 Select Edit.  
3 Scroll to the member you want to remove.  
4 Press m.  
1 Choose the first Walkie-Talkie number that you  
want in the Group Walkie-Talkie call:  
5 Select Remove Member.  
6 Select Save.  
From the idle screen, enter the Walkie-Talkie  
number. -or-  
To remove all members from a Group:  
From the Contacts list, scroll to an entry  
containing the Walkie-Talkie number. -or-  
1 From Contacts, scroll to the group you want to  
edit and press Edit.  
23  
         
Making Calls  
2 Press m.  
4 Press A under Save.  
3 Select Remove All Members.  
4 Press A under Yes to confirm the deletion.  
Group Walkie-Talkie Call Information  
While you are in a Group Walkie-Talkie call, the  
following appears on the screen:  
To delete a Group from Contacts:  
1 From Contacts, scroll to the Group you want to  
delete.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete Group.  
4 Press A under Yes to confirm.  
The name of the Group  
The name or the Walkie-Talkie number of the  
person speaking  
The number of members who are participating in  
the Group Walkie-Talkie call  
Storing Groups  
From the Recent Calls List  
Group Walkie-Talkie Call Details  
During a Group Walkie-Talkie call, you can view  
details about the other group members, such as  
their name or Walkie-Talkie number, and their  
status on the call.  
1 From the recent calls list, select the Group you  
want.  
2 Press A under Store.  
3 If you want, add more information to the entry.  
4 Press A under Save.  
To view Group Walkie-Talkie call details, press A  
under Details.  
In the Details view, these icons appear next to  
member names or Walkie-Talkie numbers:  
From an Active Group Walkie-Talkie Call  
1 During an active Group Walkie-Talkie call, press  
m.  
2 Select Store Group.  
3 If you want, add more information to the entry.  
The member of the Group who is speaking.  
T
A
A member of the Group who is active on the  
Group Walkie-Talkie call, but not speaking.  
Note: You cannot record a voice name during an  
active call.  
24  
     
Talkgroup Calls  
6 Enter the Walkie-Talkie number of the person  
A member of the Group who has exited the  
call.  
O
U
u
you want to send the Group to. -or-  
Select Browse to select a contact from  
Contacts, the recent calls list, or Memo.  
A member of the Group who could not be  
reached on the Group Walkie-Talkie call.  
7 Press O.  
8 To send the Group, push the Walkie-Talkie  
button.  
A member of the Group whose status is  
unknown.  
The Group will display in the recent calls list on  
the phone that you send the Group to.  
Sending Groups Using Nextel Direct  
SendSM  
You can send a Group using Nextel Direct Send so  
that the person who receives the Group can use  
the list.  
Talkgroup Calls  
Using Predefined Talkgroups  
1 From Contacts or the recent calls list, scroll to or  
select the Group you want.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Transfer.  
4 To include yourself in the Group, press A under  
Yes. -or-  
A Talkgroup call is a Walkie-Talkie call to a  
predetermined group that has been provisioned by  
Sprint or an account administrator. Talkgroups are  
limited by network (fleet) and local markets. They  
can accomodate groups up to 100 members in the  
local market.  
Groups can include up to 200 users that are in the  
same Walkie-Talkie network — that is ,users that  
have the same Walkie-Talkie network ID and are  
located in the home market. (The network ID is the  
second set of numbers in a Nextel Walkie-Talkie  
number. See “Dialing Walkie-Talkie Numbers” on  
page 21 for more information.)  
To exclude yourself from the Group, press A  
under No.  
Note: If you choose to include yourself and the  
Group already contains 20 members, you  
will be prompted that the list is full. You  
will be excluded from the list.  
5 Select Send via PTT.  
25  
         
Making Calls  
Before you can make or receive Talkgroup calls, a  
Talkgroup must be established. After the group is  
established, you must join the Talkgroup.  
Setting Up More Talkgroups  
You can set up more Talkgroups in 3 ways:  
Using Talkgroup Management* on MyNextel at  
www.sprint.com  
Joining a Talkgroup  
* You must be an account administrator to use Talkgroup  
Management.  
When you enable security, you receive a list of  
Talkgroups that have been set up for you if you  
subscribe to this service. The Talkgroup list is  
saved to Contacts.  
Contacting your Nextel Sales Representative at  
the time of activation  
Using Wireless Manager to create, manage, and  
delete Talkgroups  
To receive calls made to any of these Talkgroups,  
you must join the Talkgroup.  
When you create your Talkgroups, you can select  
your own group numbers.  
1 Press A under Contcs. -or-  
From the main menu, scroll to Contacts and  
press O.  
You can join a new Talkgroup by pressing # and  
entering the number using the keypad. Then press  
A under Join.  
2 Scroll to the Talkgroup you want to join.  
3 Press A under Join.  
Making Talkgroup Calls  
1 Press #. Then enter the Talkgroup number  
using the keypad. -or-  
Note: You will now be able to receive  
communications from this Talkgroup only.  
You can only monitor one Talkgroup at a  
time.  
Choose the Talkgroup name from Contacts or  
the recent calls list.  
2 Proceed as if making a Walkie-Talkie call.  
26  
 
Receiving Calls  
Receiving Talkgroup Calls  
To answer a Talkgroup call:  
Receiving Calls  
Phone Calls  
When you receive a phone call, your phone rings,  
vibrates, or lights up its backlight.  
Proceed as if answering a Walkie-Talkie call.  
Only one person at a time may speak on a  
Talkgroup call.  
Answering  
The Walkie-Talkie number or name of the  
person who is speaking will appear on the  
display below the Talkgroup number.  
Press s. -or-  
Press O. -or-  
Turning Off Talkgroup Calls  
To set your phone to prevent you from hearing  
your Talkgroup calls:  
Press A under Yes. -or-  
Press any number key.  
To answer a call by pressing any number key, you  
must have the Any Key Ans feature turned on (see  
“Phone Calls Features” on page 150).  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
Options > Tkgrp Silent.  
2 Set this option On.  
Sending to Voicemail  
Press e. -or-  
Press A under No.  
Ending  
To set your phone to let you hear your Talkgroup  
calls:  
Set Tkgrp Silent to Off in step 2.  
Press e.  
Walkie-Talkie Calls  
When you receive a Walkie-Talkie call, your phone  
emits a chirping sound or vibrates.  
27  
             
Making Calls  
Answering  
Select the number from the recent calls list. See  
“Making Calls From the Recent Calls List” on  
page 37.  
1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking.  
2 Press and hold the Walkie-Talkie button on the  
side of your phone. Begin talking after your  
phone emits a chirping sound.  
Select the number from Contacts. See “Making  
Calls From Contacts” on page 48.  
Select a number stored in Datebook. See  
“Making Calls From Datebook and Datebook  
Reminders” on page 143.  
3 Release the Walkie-Talkie button to listen.  
Ending  
Press e. -or-  
Use One Touch Walkie-Talkie to make a  
Walkie-Talkie call. See “One Touch  
Walkie-Talkie” on page 55.  
Use the number in Memo. See “Memo” on page  
50.  
Press A under Exit.  
A Walkie-Talkie call ends automatically if there is  
no activity on the call for a few seconds.  
Select the number in a text message you have  
received. See “Calling a Number in a Message”  
on page 88 and “Calling and Storing Numbers”  
on page 95.  
Choosing a Number to Call  
You can choose the number you want to call in  
many ways:  
Enter the number on the keypad.  
Say a voice name into your phone. See “Using a  
Voice Name” on page 28.  
Use Speed Dial or Turbo Dial® to make a phone  
call. See “Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial®” on  
page 29.  
Using a Voice Name  
If you have created a voice name in Contacts for  
the number you want to call, say the voice name  
into your phone to enter the number. See page 42  
for information on voice names.  
You can use a voice name to enter a number.  
Redial the last phone number called. See  
“Redialing the Last Number” on page 29.  
1 Press and hold t until a prompt appears telling  
you to say the voice name.  
28  
         
Missed Phone Calls  
2 Speaking into the microphone, say the voice  
Redialing the Last Number  
Press and hold s to place a call to the last phone  
number you called.  
name assigned to the number you want to call.  
Your phone plays the name back to you.  
3 If you are making a phone call, the call is placed  
Missed Phone Calls  
When you miss a call, this icon V and the number  
automatically.  
Tip: To stop a phone call from being completed,  
press e.  
of phone calls you have missed appear briefly.  
If you are making a Walkie-Talkie call, press and  
hold the Walkie-Talkie button to place the call.  
If you want to dismiss the missed call message,  
press A under Back. -or-  
Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial®  
Each phone number stored in Contacts is assigned  
a Speed Dial number, which you can use to call  
that number.  
If you want to view the missed call on the recent  
calls list, press A under View.  
Using Speakerphone  
Turning on speakerphone makes incoming sound  
come out of the phone’s speaker instead of the  
earpiece. Speakerphone is available whenever you  
are on an active phone call.  
Speed Dial  
1 From the idle screen, use the keypad to enter  
the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone  
number you want to call.  
2 Press #.  
3 Press s.  
To turn speakerphone on or off:  
Press A under Speaker. -or-  
Press t.  
Turbo Dial  
From the idle screen, press and hold the Speed  
Dial number (1 through 9) assigned to the phone  
number you want to call.  
29  
               
Making Calls  
response center has the equipment to process  
location information. See “GPS Enabled” on page  
130, and particularly “IMPORTANT: Things to  
Keep in Mind” on page 130 and “Making an  
Emergency Call” on page 132, for more  
information on the limitations of this feature.  
Because of the limitations of this feature, always  
provide your best knowledge of your location to the  
emergency response center when you make an  
emergency call.  
Using Mute  
Muting calls lets you listen to incoming sound  
without transmitting sound. Mute is available  
whenever you are on an active call.  
To turn mute on:  
Press A under Mute.  
While mute is on, Unmute appears as a display  
option.  
Important: Emergency calls cannot be placed  
while the keypad is locked.  
To turn mute off:  
Press A under Unmute.  
Important: If you have not registered on the  
network, emergency calls cannot be  
placed while your SIM card is in your  
phone.  
Making Emergency Phone  
Calls  
Your phone supports emergency calling.  
Emergency phone calls can be made even when  
your SIM card is blocked or not in your phone.  
Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency  
response center. If you are on an active call, you  
must end it before calling 911.  
When you make an emergency call, your phone’s  
GPS Enabled feature can help emergency service  
personnel find you, if you are in a location where  
your phone's GPS antenna has established a clear  
view of the open sky and your local emergency  
30  
         
Making Emergency Phone Calls  
Important: If you are bringing your phone number  
to Nextel from your previous carrier,  
you may receive a temporary telephone  
number while your Nextel phone is  
being programmed with your  
permanent phone number. If you make  
a call to 911 and the call fails, the 911  
emergency response center will not be  
able to call you back on your Nextel  
phone if in the meantime, your Nextel  
phone has been programmed with your  
permanent telephone number. If the call  
is disconnected before location and  
details have been provided, call 911  
again and advise that you were  
disconnected.  
31  
Receiving Call Alerts  
When you receive a call alert, you must answer,  
queue, or clear it. You cannot receive phone calls  
or Walkie-Talkie calls until you do.  
Call Alerts  
Sending a call alert lets the recipient know you  
want to talk to him or her on a Walkie-Talkie call.  
When you send a call alert, the recipient’s phone  
emits a series of beeps, or vibrates, and displays  
your name or Walkie-Talkie number.  
To answer a call alert:  
Press the Walkie-Talkie button to make a  
Walkie-Talkie call to the sender.  
The recipient can:  
To queue a call alert:  
Press A under Queue.  
To clear a call alert:  
Press O. -or-  
Answer — begin a Walkie-Talkie call with the  
sender  
Queue — store the call alert to the call alert  
queue, which is a list of call alerts  
Clear — dismiss and delete the call alert  
Press A under Clear.  
Sending Call Alerts  
1 Enter the Walkie-Talkie number you want to  
send to, as you would when making a  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
2 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears  
on the display.  
Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts  
you have received. They appear as  
Walkie-Talkie calls. Call alerts remain in  
your recent calls list until you delete them  
or until they reach the end of the list.  
Using the Call Alert Queue  
When you queue a call alert, it remains in the call  
alert queue until you make a Walkie-Talkie call to  
the sender or delete it.  
3 Press the Walkie-Talkie button until Alert  
Successful appears on the display.  
Note: If the alert is not successful, this may  
mean the person you are trying to reach is  
on a call or has the phone turned off.  
32  
               
Using the Call Alert Queue  
4 Press the Walkie-Talkie button until Alert  
Successful appears on the display.  
Viewing Call Alerts  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Scroll through the list.  
Deleting Call Alerts  
To delete a call alert from the queue:  
Viewing Date and Time  
To view the date and time a call alert was received:  
1 From the call alert queue, scroll to the call alert  
you want to delete.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Select the call alert you want information on.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Responding to Call Alerts in the  
Queue  
To delete all call alerts from the queue:  
1 From the call alert queue, press m.  
2 From the call alert menu, select Delete All.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
After you queue a call alert, you can respond to it  
by making a Walkie-Talkie call to the sender or  
sending a call alert to the sender.  
Making a Walkie-Talkie Call to the Sender  
Sorting Call Alerts  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to.  
3 Press the Walkie-Talkie button to begin the call.  
Tip: You must have at least one call alert in the  
queue to access this feature.  
To sort call alerts by the order they were received:  
This removes the call alert from the queue.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Sort By.  
Sending a Call Alert to the Sender  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to.  
3 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears  
on the display.  
4 Select First on Top or Last on Top.  
33  
       
The Walkie-Talkie number Contacts type icon  
appears when you receive a Walkie-Talkie call or  
call alert, even if the number is not stored in  
Contacts.  
Recent Calls  
The recent calls list displays information  
associated with calls you have made and received,  
and call alerts you have received. It also displays  
My Info and contact information sent to you from  
other phones.  
Call alerts you have received appear as  
Walkie-Talkie calls. Like all items in the recent calls  
list, they remain listed until you delete them or until  
they reach the end of the list.  
The recent calls list displays up to 20 items.  
For phone calls, an additional icon appears giving  
information about the call:  
Calls and Call Alerts  
The recent calls list displays the numbers of up to  
20 of the most recent calls you have made and  
received.  
A call you made.  
X
W
V
A call you received.  
If the number of a recent call is stored in Contacts,  
the following information appears:  
A missed call. Missed calls appear on the  
recent calls list only if you have Caller ID.  
The name assigned to the number  
The picture assigned to the number, if your  
phone is set to show pictures on the recent calls  
list.  
When you select a call to view its details, you see  
information such as the name associated with the  
call, the number, date, time, and duration of the  
call.  
The Contacts type icon associated with the  
number. If the Contacts entry containing the  
number has more than one number or address  
stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type icon.  
My Info From Other Phones  
The recent calls list displays My Info from other  
phones.  
34  
             
Contact Information From Other Phones  
The name or Walkie-Talkie number of the person  
who sent the contact information appears as a  
separate item on the recent calls list, above the  
information sent. If one person sends you more  
than one item of contact information, all the items  
appear below the person’s name or Walkie-Talkie  
number.  
This icon j appears with My Info from other  
phones on the recent calls list, along with the  
Walkie-Talkie number of the person who sent the  
information.  
When you select My Info from other phones to view  
its details, you see all the information sent.  
If you receive My Info from the same phone more  
than once, only the most recently sent version  
appears in the recent calls list.  
When you select contact information to view its  
details, you see the name or Walkie-Talkie number  
of the person who sent the information and all the  
information in the item.  
Contact Information From  
Other Phones  
The recent calls list displays contact information  
sent from other phones. This information comes  
from the other phone’s Contacts list or recent calls  
list.  
If you receive contact information with the same  
name from the same phone more than once, only  
the most recently sent version appears in the  
recent calls list.  
Viewing the Recent Calls List  
1 From the idle screen, press the navigation key  
as if scrolling down. -or-  
This icon d appears with contact information on  
the recent calls list.  
From the main menu, select Recent Calls.  
2 Scroll through the list.  
Contact information in the recent calls list displays:  
The name contained in the contact information  
To view the details of an item on the list:  
The Contacts type icon associated with the  
number or address contained in the contact  
information. If the item contains more than one  
number or address stored, <> surrounds the  
Contacts type icon.  
From the recent calls list, select the item you  
want information on.  
Tip: To view the details of more items, keep  
scrolling.  
35  
       
Recent Calls  
To store the number to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
Choosing Picture View or List View  
You can set your phone to show the picture  
associated with each item as you view the recent  
calls list or show the list without pictures.  
Note: Storing My Info or contact information  
from another phone to a Contacts entry  
that has a name assigned to it does not  
change the name of the Contacts entry.  
1 From the recent calls list, press m.  
2 Select Recent Calls View.  
3 Select List View to show the recent calls list  
without pictures. -or-  
4 If the item you want to store is a call, you must  
assign a Contacts type to the number:  
With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number.  
Select Picture View to show the picture  
associated with each entry.  
5 Press A under Save.  
Storing Items to Contacts  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to or select the  
Deleting Items  
To delete an item from the recent calls list:  
item you want to store.  
2 Press A under Store. -or-  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to or select the  
item you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete. -or-  
If Store is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Store or Update Contacts.  
Tip: If the item you want to store is a call, Store  
does not appear if the number is already  
stored in Contacts.  
If Delete is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Delete.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
3 To store the item as a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
36  
         
Making Calls From the Recent Calls List  
To delete all items on the recent calls list:  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
1 From the recent calls list, press m.  
2 Select Delete All.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
You can also make calls while viewing the details  
of an item on the recent calls list:  
1 From the recent calls list, select the item  
containing the number you want to call.  
Making Calls From the Recent  
Calls List  
If you select a call or contact information from  
another phone, you can make a call to the  
number shown first on the details screen.  
1 From the main menu, select Recent Calls.  
If you scroll to My Info from another phone,  
you can make a call to the Walkie-Talkie  
number of the phone that sent the  
information.  
2 Scroll to the item containing the number you  
want to call.  
If you scroll to a call, you can make a call to  
the number that made the call. If the number  
is stored in Contacts, you can make a call to  
any of the numbers stored with it.  
If you scroll to My Info from another phone,  
you can make a call to the Walkie-Talkie  
number of the phone that sent the  
information.  
2 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
If you scroll to contact information from  
another phone, you can make a call to any of  
the numbers in the contact information.  
3 To place the call now, go to step 4. -or-  
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to call.  
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
37  
       
Using Word Mode  
Entering Text  
In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters  
on the keypad button you press and arranges them  
to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input  
matches your keystrokes to words in its database  
and displays the most commonly used matching  
word. You can add your own words to this  
database.  
You can enter text, numbers, and symbols into  
your phone using Alpha, Word, Numeric, or  
Symbol text input modes.  
Alpha — Press a key several times for each  
l
j
character.  
Word — Press a key once for each letter  
while words likely to be the one you want are  
chosen from a database.  
Entering a Word  
1 Select Word as your text input mode.  
2 Type a word by pressing one key for each letter.  
Symbols — Enter punctuation and other  
i
k
symbols.  
For example, to type “test” press 8 3 7 8.  
Numeric — Enter numbers.  
The displayed word may change as you type it.  
Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to  
the end of the word before editing.  
When you access a screen that requires you to  
enter text, you start in the mode last used.  
3 If the word that appears is not the desired word,  
press 0 to change the word on the display to  
the next most likely word in the database.  
To choose a text input mode:  
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press  
m.  
Repeat until the desired word appears.  
2 Select the text input mode you want to use. A  
checkmark appears next to the current mode.  
If the desired word does not appear, you can add it  
to the database.  
38  
               
Special Function Keys  
Adding Words to the Database  
Capitalization  
1 Select Alpha as your text input mode.  
2 Type the word using Alpha mode.  
3 Select Word as your text input mode.  
4 Press #.  
When you press and hold the # key, it acts as a  
3-way toggle. Press and hold # to make the next  
letter typed uppercase (shift), to make all  
subsequent letters typed uppercase (caps lock), or  
to go back to lowercase letters.  
The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is  
now in the database.  
These icons appear in the top row of your display:  
Note: You cannot store alphanumeric  
Shift is on.  
mor X  
combinations, such as Y2K.  
Caps lock is on.  
nor W  
Choosing a Language  
When neither of these icons appear, letters typed  
are lowercase. Scrolling up after typing a letter  
makes that letter uppercase.  
To change the language of the database:  
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press  
m.  
2 Select Languages.  
3 Select the language you want for your database.  
Note: Your phone automatically makes the first  
letter of a sentence uppercase.  
Punctuation  
Special Function Keys  
Some of the phone’s keys assume different  
functions while in Alpha or Word mode.  
Press 1 or 0 to insert punctuation. Continue to  
press the key to view the list of symbols available  
through that key. Pause to select the symbol you  
want.  
Spaces  
Press # for a space.  
Note: Additional punctuation symbols are  
available in Symbols mode.  
39  
   
Entering Text  
Using Numeric Mode  
1 Select Numeric as your text input mode.  
2 Press the number buttons on your keypad to  
enter numbers.  
Using Symbols Mode  
1 Select Symbols as your text input mode.  
A row of symbols appears along the bottom of  
the phone’s display. Scroll right to view the  
complete row.  
2 Press O to select the highlighted symbol.  
40  
 
A Contacts type — Each number or address  
stored must be assigned a Contacts type:  
Contacts  
Contacts stores up to 600 numbers or addresses.  
Each Contacts entry can store several numbers or  
addresses.  
Mobile  
DC  
phone number  
Walkie-Talkie number  
phone number  
phone number  
phone number  
email address  
phone number  
phone number  
A
B
Information stored in Contacts is saved on your  
SIM card.  
Work1  
Work2  
Home  
Email  
Fax  
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
S
A Contacts entry contains:  
A name — A name is required if you are storing  
more than one number or address to the entry;  
otherwise, it is optional. Typically, this is the  
name of the person whose contact information is  
stored in the entry.  
A ring tone — This is the sound your phone  
makes when you receive phone calls or call  
alerts from any of the numbers stored in the  
entry. You can assign the ring tone from your list  
of ring tones. If you do not assign a ring tone, the  
entry is created with a default ring tone  
assigned.  
Pager  
Talkgroup Talkgroup number  
Group  
IP  
Group  
IP address  
phone number  
J
K
A picture — This picture appears on the display  
when you receive phone calls from any of the  
phone numbers stored in the entry. You can  
assign the picture from the pictures stored in the  
media center. If you do not assign a picture, the  
entry is created with no picture assigned.  
Other  
41  
             
Contacts  
A number or address — Each Contacts entry  
Creating Entries  
A number or address and a Contacts type are  
required for all Contacts entries. Other information  
is optional. You may enter the information in any  
order by scrolling through the entry details.  
must contain a number or address. This may be  
any type of phone number, Walkie-Talkie  
number, Group, Talkgroup number, email  
address, or IP address.  
Note: You can store numbers up to 64 digits  
long, but every 20 digits must be  
After you have entered the number or address,  
Contacts type, and any other information you want,  
you can press A under Save to save the entry to  
Contacts.  
separated by a pause or wait. See  
“Creating Pauses and Waits” on page 47.  
A Speed Dial number — When you store a  
phone number, it is assigned a Speed Dial  
number. You can accept the default Speed Dial  
number or change it.  
To cancel a Contacts entry at any time, press e to  
return to the idle screen.  
To create a Contacts entry:  
A voice name — If you create a voice name for a  
number, you can then dial that number by  
saying the voice name into your phone. This  
iconPappears to the left of the Contacts type  
icon if a voice name is assigned.  
1 To access the entry details screen:  
Select Contacts > [New Contact]. -or-  
From the Contacts list, press m. Select New  
Contact.  
Accessing Contacts  
From the main menu, select Contacts. -or-  
2 If you want to assign a name to the entry:  
Select Name.  
Enter the name. When you are finished, press  
O.  
If you are on a call: Press m. Select Contacts.  
Tip: Press A under Browse to select a name  
already in Contacts.  
42  
                 
Creating Entries  
3 If you want to assign a ring tone or picture to the  
entry, select [Ring Tone/Picture]. See  
“Assigning a Ring Tone or Picture” on page 43.  
Enter the additional information for the entry  
using step 3 through step 6. You must assign a  
name to the entry, if you have not already.  
4 To assign a Contacts type to the number or  
address being stored:  
8 Press A under Save.  
Assigning a Ring Tone or Picture  
Select the Contacts type field.  
1 If you have not already, select [Ring  
Select the Contacts type you want to assign.  
5 To store a number or address:  
Tone/Picture].  
2 If you want to assign a ring tone from the list of  
ring tones:  
Select the # field (or ID for an email address, or  
IP for an IP address).  
With Ringer highlighted, scroll left or right to  
choose a ring tone. -or-  
Enter the number or address. For phone  
numbers, use the 10-digit format. For email  
addresses, see “Entering Text” on page 37.  
Select Ringer. Select the ring tone you want to  
assign.  
Tip: Press A under Browse to select a number  
or address from Contacts, the recent calls  
list, or Memo.  
3 If you want to assign a picture from the media  
center:  
Scroll to Picture. Scroll left or right to choose a  
picture. -or-  
When you are finished, press O.  
6 If you want to change the default Speed Dial  
number or a create a voice name for the entry,  
select [Options]. See “Assigning a Speed Dial  
Number or Voice Name” on page 44.  
7 If you want to add more numbers or addresses  
to the entry:  
Select Picture. Select the picture you want to  
assign.  
Only pictures that can be assigned to Contacts  
entries are displayed. Some large pictures  
cannot be assigned.  
Tip: If an entry has a picture assigned and you  
want the entry to have no picture, select  
[No Picture] or press A under Unassign.  
Scroll past the information you already entered.  
43  
       
Contacts  
4 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
Editing Entries  
Assigning a Speed Dial Number or  
Voice Name  
1 If you have not already, select [Options].  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to or select the  
entry you want to edit.  
2 Press A under Edit. -or-  
If Edit is not one of your options: Press m.  
2 The default Speed Dial number assigned to a  
phone number is displayed in the Speed # field.  
This is always the next available Speed Dial  
location.  
Select Edit.  
The entry details screen displays.  
3 Follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 42 to edit the various fields.  
If you want to assign the phone number to a  
different Speed Dial location:  
With the Speed # field highlighted, press O.  
Viewing Entries  
When you view Contacts entries, you can choose  
how much detail you want to see.  
Press A under Delete to delete the current  
Speed Dial number.  
Enter the new Speed Dial number using the  
keypad.  
Viewing the Contacts List  
In this view, each entry shows:  
When you are finished, press O.  
The name assigned to the entry  
3 If you want to create a voice name for a phone  
number, select Voice Name.  
A small version of the picture assigned to the  
entry, if you have set Contacts to show pictures  
in the Contacts list.  
As directed by the screen prompts, say and  
repeat the name you want to assign to the  
number. Speak clearly into the microphone.  
The types of numbers and addresses stored in  
the entry  
4 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
To view entries from the Contacts list:  
1 Access Contacts.  
44  
           
Viewing Entries  
2 Scroll to view entries.  
Viewing More Details  
When an entry is selected, you can view more  
details about the entry by selecting items within the  
entry.  
Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the  
keypad to enter the first letter of the name.  
3 If an entry has more than one number or  
address stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type  
icon. Scroll left or right to view the icon for each  
number stored in the entry.  
Viewing Details of a Number or Address  
1 Select the entry.  
2 Select the number or address you want to view  
details of.  
Selecting an Entry  
If you select a phone number, you can view its  
Speed Dial number and see whether it has a  
voice name.  
In this view, each entry shows:  
The name assigned to the entry  
A small version of the picture assigned to the  
entry  
To return to the entry, press A under Back or  
press O.  
The name of the ring tone assigned to the entry  
The numbers and addresses stored in the entry  
Viewing a Large Picture  
To view a large version of the picture assigned to  
an entry:  
To select an entry:  
1 From the Contacts list, select the entry you want  
1 Select the entry.  
to view.  
2 Select the first item shown on the entry screen.  
This item shows the name assigned to the entry  
or No Name.  
2 Scroll to view the numbers and addresses  
stored in the entry.  
Tip: To select other entries: Scroll left or right.  
Note: You cannot make calls from this view.  
Or, press # or *.  
To return to the entry, press A under Back or  
press O.  
To return to the Contacts list, press A under Back.  
45  
Contacts  
Choosing Picture View or List View  
You can set Contacts to show the picture assigned  
to each entry as you view the Contacts list or show  
the Contacts list without pictures.  
Showing Only Walkie-Talkie  
Numbers, Groups, and Talkgroups  
To set Contacts to show only entries that contain  
Walkie-Talkie numbers, Groups, and Talkgroup  
entries:  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Contacts View.  
3 Select List View to show the Contacts list  
without pictures. -or-  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Filter.  
3 Set this option to Show DC.  
Select Picture View to show the picture  
To set Contacts to show all entries:  
assigned to each entry.  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Filter.  
Searching for a Name  
3 Set this option to Show All.  
To search for a name in Contacts:  
1 From the Contacts list, press A under Search.  
-or-  
Deleting Entries  
If Search is not one of your options: Press m.  
Delete an Entry  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to or select the  
entry you want to delete.  
Select Search.  
2 Enter the name you want to see.  
3 Press O.  
2 Press m.  
3 To delete the entire entry, select Delete  
Your phone finds the name you entered or the  
nearest match.  
Contact.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
46  
             
Checking Capacity  
Delete a Number or Address  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry that  
contains the number or address you want to  
delete.  
2 Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to delete. -or-  
Creating Pauses and Waits  
When storing a number, you can program your  
phone to pause or wait between digits while  
dialing. A pause makes your phone pause for 3  
seconds before dialing further. A wait makes your  
phone wait for your response before dialing further.  
Select the entry. Scroll to or select the number  
you want to delete.  
This feature is useful when using voicemail or other  
automated phone systems that require you to dial a  
phone number and then enter an access number.  
3 Press m.  
To program a pause:  
4 Select Delete Number.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Press and hold * until the letter P appears. The  
P represents a 3-second pause.  
Note: If an entry contains only one number or  
address, deleting the number or address  
deletes the entry.  
If you store 17035551235P1234, when you select  
this number and make a call, your phone dials the  
first 11 digits, pauses for 3 seconds, then dials the  
last 4 digits.  
Checking Capacity  
If you want a pause longer than 3 seconds, press  
and hold * more than once. Each P represents a  
3-second pause.  
To see how many numbers are stored in Contacts:  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Capacity.  
To program a wait:  
Press and hold * until the letter W appears. The  
W means your phone waits before dialing  
further.  
47  
           
Contacts  
If you store 17035551235W1234, when you select  
this number and make a call, your phone dials the  
first 11 digits and then waits. A message appears  
asking if you want to send the rest of the digits.  
Press A under Yes to dial the last 4 digits.  
Making Calls From Contacts  
While Viewing the Contacts List  
1 Access Contacts.  
2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call.  
Tip: You can create pauses and waits while  
dialing a number from the keypad. See  
“Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing”  
on page 55.  
Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the  
keypad to enter the first letter of the name.  
3 To place the call now, go to step 4. -or-  
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to call.  
International Numbers  
When storing a number that you plan to use for  
international calls, use Plus Dialing:  
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A “0”  
appears, then changes to a “+”.  
If you are making a Walkie-Talkie call, your phone  
places the call to the Walkie-Talkie number stored  
in the Contacts entry, even if the Walkie-Talkie icon  
is not displayed.  
Note: The network translates the “+” into the  
appropriate international access code  
needed to place the call.  
2 Enter the country code, city code or area code,  
and phone number.  
If you are making a phone call:  
Your phone places the call to the phone number  
assigned to the Contacts type displayed.  
For information about making international calls,  
see “Making International Calls” on page 55.  
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number, your phone places the call to the phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry.  
48  
         
Making Calls From Contacts  
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number and you have more than one phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry, your phone  
prompts you to select the phone number you  
want to place the call to.  
After Selecting an Entry  
1 Access Contacts.  
2 Select the Contacts entry that contains the  
number you want to call.  
3 Scroll to or select the number you want to call.  
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
If you try to make a type of call that does not match  
the Contacts type of the number you chose, no call  
is placed.  
49  
To store the memo number to Contacts:  
Memo  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Store to Contacts.  
4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
Memo lets you store a number, make a call to that  
number, and save it to Contacts.  
To create a memo:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Enter the number using your keypad.  
3 Press O.  
To store the number to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number.  
To view the memo later:  
From the main menu, select Memo.  
To delete the memo:  
6 Press A under Save.  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Press and hold A under Delete.  
3 Press O.  
To edit the memo:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Enter the new number.  
3 Press O.  
To make a call to the memo number:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
50  
               
To forward all calls:  
Call Forwarding  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
Forward > All Calls.  
2 Select To.  
Call forwarding sends calls to the phone numbers  
you specify. You can forward all calls to one  
number or forward missed calls to different  
numbers depending on the reason you missed the  
call. You can forward phone lines 1 and 2  
independently.  
If you specified a forwarding number for all calls  
before, this number displays.  
To forward calls to this number, press A under  
Back.  
Forwarding All Calls  
When you set your phone to forward all calls, an  
icon appears in the top row of the display:  
To delete this number, press O, then press and  
hold A under Delete.  
3 To enter the number you want to forward calls to:  
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 1  
are being forwarded.  
G
I
H
J
L
K
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 2  
are being forwarded.  
4 Press O.  
Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone lines 1  
and 2 are being forwarded.  
All your calls are now forwarded to the number you  
specified.  
Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 1  
are being forwarded.  
Turning Off Call Forwarding  
If you do not want all your calls forwarded, turn the  
feature off:  
Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 2  
are being forwarded.  
Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone lines 1  
and 2 are being forwarded.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward > To.  
2 Set this option to Off.  
51  
             
Call Forwarding  
All your calls are now sent to your phone.  
2 Select If Busy to specify a forwarding number  
for calls received when your phone is busy.  
Calls you miss are forwarded according to the  
options set for missed calls. By default, missed  
calls are forwarded to voicemail.  
3 If you specified a forwarding number for this type  
of call before, this number displays.  
To forward calls to this number, press A under  
Forwarding Missed Calls  
You can specify a forwarding number for each type  
of missed call:  
Back and go to step 6. -or-  
To delete this number, press O, then press and  
hold A under Delete.  
4 To enter the number you want to forward this  
If Busy — Your phone is on a call or transferring  
type of call to:  
data.  
If No Answer — You do not answer on the first  
4 rings.  
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
If Unreachable — Your phone is out of  
coverage or powered off.  
Note: If you want a type of missed call sent to  
voicemail, the call forwarding number for  
that type of missed call must be your  
voicemail access number. In most cases,  
your voicemail access number is your  
area code + first 3 digits of your PTN +  
MAIL (6245). To verify your voicemail  
access number, contact Nextel Customer  
Service.  
5 Press O.  
6 Repeat step 2 through step 5 for If No Answer  
and If Unreachable.  
7 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
Viewing Call Forwarding  
Settings  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
To forward missed calls:  
Forward > All Calls.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
Forward > Detailed.  
2 With To highlighted, press A under Status.  
52  
         
Turn Off Call Waiting  
To turn off Call Waiting during a call:  
Advanced Calling  
Features  
1 Press m.  
2 Select In Call Setup > Call Waiting.  
3 Set this option to Off.  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting lets you receive a second call while on  
an active call. Call Waiting is always available,  
unless you turn it off for a specific call.  
Tip: To turn Call Waiting back on while still on  
the call, set this option to On.  
To turn off Call Waiting for the next call you make  
or receive:  
If you are on a call and receive a second call, your  
phone emits a tone and displays a message saying  
you are receiving a second call.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > Call Waiting.  
2 Set this option to Off.  
To accept the second call and put the active call on  
hold:  
Call Waiting is turned back on when you end the  
call.  
Press A under Yes.  
To accept the second call and end the active call:  
1 Press e.  
Switching Between Calls  
Any time you have one call active and one call on  
hold, to make the call on hold active and put the  
active call on hold:  
Your phone rings with the second call.  
2 Answer the second call.  
To decline the second call:  
Press A under Switch. -or-  
Press A under No. If you subscribe to  
voicemail, the call is forwarded to your voicemail  
box, unless you set Call Forward for If Busy to  
a different number.  
If Switch is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Switch.  
53  
           
Advanced Calling Features  
Merging 2 Calls Into a 3-Way Call  
After you put a call on hold and place a second  
call, you can combine these calls into a 3-way call:  
Putting a Call on Hold  
1 While on an active call, press m.  
2 Select Hold.  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Join.  
If you want to make the call active again, press A  
under Resume.  
All 3 people in the call can speak to and hear each  
other.  
Calling 2 People  
Note: To disconnect one party from a 3-way call,  
you must advise either caller to hang up.  
You cannot disconnect one party at a  
time.  
Putting a Call on Hold, Making a  
Second Call  
1 Place or receive a phone call.  
2 While the call is active, press m.  
3 Select 2nd Call. This puts the call on hold.  
4 Enter the second phone number you want to  
call.  
Making a 3-Way Call  
1 Place or receive a phone call.  
2 While the call is active, press m.  
3 Select 3 Way. This puts the call on hold.  
4 Enter the second phone number you want to  
call.  
Tip: For quick ways to enter the number, press  
m.  
5 Press s to place the call.  
Tip: For quick ways to enter the number, press  
To end the second call and make the call on hold  
active again:  
m.  
5 Press s to place the call.  
6 Press A under Join.  
Press e.  
To make the call on hold active and put the active  
call on hold:  
All 3 people in the call can speak to and hear each  
other.  
Press A under Switch.  
54  
       
Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing  
Note: You cannot make any other calls after you  
have joined a 3-way call, even if one party  
disconnects.  
Making International Calls  
Your service default is “International Calls  
Restricted.” Contact Nextel Customer Service to  
obtain international dialing access.  
Creating Pauses and Waits  
While Dialing  
You can enter a pause or wait while dialing a  
number. For more information on pauses and  
waits, see “Creating Pauses and Waits” on page  
47.  
Calls placed between the United States and  
Canada do not require an international access  
code.  
Plus Dialing lets you place an international call to  
most countries without entering the local  
international access code.  
To create a pause while dialing a phone number:  
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A “0”  
appears, then changes to a “+”.  
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to  
occur before the pause.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Insert Pause.  
Note: The network translates the “+” into the  
appropriate international access code  
needed to place the call.  
4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the  
pause.  
2 Enter the country code, city code or area code,  
and phone number.  
To create a wait while dialing a phone number:  
3 Press s.  
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to  
One Touch Walkie-Talkie  
occur before the wait.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Insert Wait.  
4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the wait.  
One Touch Walkie-Talkie sets your phone to call  
either the most recent Walkie-Talkie number or  
Group on the recent calls list, or a Walkie-Talkie  
number you choose, every time you press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
55  
                       
Advanced Calling Features  
Setting One Touch Walkie-Talkie®  
To the Most Recent Walkie-Talkie Number or  
Group  
Call Timers  
Call timers measure the duration of your phone  
calls, Walkie-Talkie calls, and circuit data use, as  
well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received  
by your phone:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
Options > One Touch DC.  
Last Call — displays the duration of your most  
2 Set this option to Last Call.  
recent phone call.  
To an Assigned Walkie-Talkie Number  
Phone Reset — keeps a running total of your  
phone call minutes, until you reset it.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
Options > One Touch DC > Assigned  
Number.  
2 To enter the Walkie-Talkie number you want  
your phone to call every time you press the  
Walkie-Talkie button:  
Phone Lifetime — displays the total minutes of  
all your phone calls.  
DC/GC Reset — keeps a running total of all of  
your Walkie-Talkie call minutes, until you reset  
it.  
DC/GC Lifetime — displays the total minutes of  
all your Walkie-Talkie calls.  
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
Circuit Reset — keeps a running total of all of  
your circuit data use, until you reset it.  
Tip: If you are entering a Talkgroup number,  
Circuit Lifetime — displays the total minutes of  
all of your circuit data use.  
enter # before the number.  
3 Press O.  
Kbytes Reset — keeps a running total of the  
number of Kilobytes sent and received by your  
phone, until you reset it.  
Turning Off One Touch Walkie-Talkie®  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
To view or reset a timer:  
Options > One Touch DC.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Timers.  
2 Set this option to Off.  
56  
     
Using Your Phone as a Modem  
2 Select the feature you want to view or reset.  
3 To view a feature without resetting: Press O  
when you are finished viewing. -or-  
Connecting With a Data Cable  
To use a data cable to connect your phone to a  
laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer:  
To reset a feature: Press A under Reset. Press  
O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 Open the connector cover.  
Note: The values displayed by Call Timers  
should not be used for billing. Call timers  
are estimates only.  
Using Your Phone as a  
Modem  
connector  
cover  
You can use your phone as a modem with a laptop,  
handheld device, or desktop computer. In order to  
use your phone as a modem, you must create  
either a wired or wireless connection between your  
phone and the other device.To connect your phone  
wirelessly, you must have a Bluetooth adapter for  
the other device. To create a wired connection, use  
a serial data cable.  
2 With the phone’s display facing up, insert the  
data cable’s connector into the accessory  
connector, until you hear a click.  
57  
       
Advanced Calling Features  
3 Insert the data plug into the data port of the  
Features for the Hearing  
Impaired  
other device.  
Connecting With Bluetooth  
Making TTY Calls  
To use your phone as a modem via Bluetooth, the  
laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer you  
want to connect to must have a Bluetooth adapter  
installed.  
To use your phone to make phone calls using a  
teletypewriter (TTY) device:  
1 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the  
stereo headset jack on your phone. Connect the  
other end of the cable to your TTY device.  
2 Make sure that your phone’s TTY feature is on  
and select the TTY mode you want to use.  
Check that the adapter is properly installed, and  
then follow the specific instructions outlined in the  
device’s user guide to connect the device to your  
phone.  
3 Use your phone to enter phone numbers and  
About Data Transfer Modes  
When used as a modem, your phone has these  
data transfer modes:  
make calls.  
When you make a TTY call, these icons appear on  
the phone’s display:  
Circuit data — used for sending and receiving  
faxes and for transferring large files  
Phone call is active.  
Phone call is on hold.  
N
O
Packet data — used for small file transfers such  
as email  
To use these services, you must install the iDEN  
Wireless Data Services software (available  
separately) and subscribe to a Nextel Wireless  
Web access plan. For more information on setting  
up your computer and your i615 phone for packet  
and circuit data calls, go to www.sprint.com.  
TTY device features such as Turbo-Code,  
High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by  
your phone. These features must be turned off or  
disabled to use your TTY device with your phone.  
58  
                   
Making TTY Calls  
To change mode during a call using your phone:  
Turning On the TTY Feature  
1 Press m.  
2 Select In Call Setup > TTY > Type.  
3 Select the mode you want.  
Your phone’s TTY feature must be on if you want  
to make TTY calls, set the TTY mode, or change  
the TTY baud rate. To make sure the TTY feature  
is on:  
To change mode during a call using your TTY  
device, issue one of the following commands:  
From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > TTY > Use TTY. This field must say On.  
“VCO please” — to select VCO mode  
“HCO please” — to select HCO mode  
“HCO off please” — to turn off HCO mode  
Choosing a Mode  
Your phone supports these TTY modes:  
Important: When you are using HCO, the sound  
coming from your phone speaker may  
be uncomfortably loud. Use caution  
when putting the phone to your ear.  
(For information on setting the volume  
of your phone speaker, see “Setting the  
Volume” on page 146.)  
TTY — You type and read text on your TTY  
device.  
VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) — You speak into your  
phone and read text replies on your TTY device.  
HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) — You type text on  
your TTY device and listen to voice replies on  
your phone speaker.  
Changing the TTY Baud Rate  
To change mode while not in a call:  
By default, your phone’s TTY baud rate is set to  
45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within  
the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your  
TTY baud rate to 50.00.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > TTY > Type.  
2 Select the TTY mode you want.  
When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the  
TTY mode you last selected.  
To change the TTY baud rate:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > TTY > Baud.  
59  
     
Advanced Calling Features  
2 Select the baud rate for your location.  
Special Dialing Codes  
Non-Emergency Numbers  
Note: Using 711 to reach Telecommunications  
Relay Service may not be available in all  
areas.  
Nextel supports many “non-emergency” numbers  
(such as #77, 311,...) provided by local and state  
governments. These numbers are used to report  
non-emergency incidents. If the situation includes  
imminent danger or loss of life, you should dial  
911.  
Telecommunications Relay Service  
Nextel supports services for communicating with  
speech and/or hearing impaired individuals. You  
can dial 711 to reach a local Telecommunications  
Relay Center. You will then be connected to your  
destination number. Relay service works through a  
Communications Assistant who reads messages  
typed into a TDD/TTY device by a speech or  
hearing impaired individual to you. The  
Communications Assistant then types your spoken  
messages to the hearing or speech impaired  
individual. Telecommunications Relay Service is  
available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and  
every call is strictly confidential.  
60  
       
Your Nextel phone number cannot be blocked from  
calls made to 911, 800, 855, 866, 877, 888, or  
other toll-free phone numbers.  
Nextel® Phone Services  
Contact Nextel Customer Service to obtain these  
services or for additional information:  
Per-Line Blocking  
You can permanently block delivery of your phone  
number on every call you make.  
Note: Some services are not available outside  
of the continental United States.  
Caller ID  
To show your number on a per-call basis:  
Your phone can automatically display the phone  
number or name (if the 10-digit phone number is  
stored in your Contacts) of the person calling  
(unless blocked by the caller), enabling you to  
decide whether to take the call or forward it to  
voicemail.  
Press * 8 2 before dialing the call.  
Second Line Service  
You can have two different phone numbers on the  
same phone. With Second Line Service, you can:  
If you have assigned a picture to the 10-digit phone  
number in you Contacts, the picture displays when  
you receive a call from that number. See  
“Assigning to Contacts” on page 102.  
Get separate bills for each phone line.  
Bring in an existing wireless or home phone  
number to Nextel to activate on the second line.  
Have two different area codes (must be in same  
market) to convey a local image to callers.  
Caller ID information is not available on all calls.  
Use different ringer styles so that you can tell  
which line is receiving a call.  
Per-Call Blocking  
You can block delivery of your phone number to  
other Caller ID units for a single phone call:  
Forward incoming calls to either your primary or  
alternate line phone number.  
Press * 6 7 before dialing the call.  
Choose a Second Line Service plan that fits your  
needs.  
61  
         
Nextel® Phone Services  
In order to activate a Second Line Service, contact  
your Nextel Sales Representative or call Nextel  
Customer Service.  
To set the active line (primary or alternate):  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > Set Line.  
2 Select the phone line you want to be the active  
line.  
When incoming calls are made to a non-active line,  
these calls will be sent to voicemail without ringing.  
See “Call Forwarding” on page 51.  
Call Restrictions  
You can prevent your phone from making or  
receiving long distance, incoming, and outgoing  
(except 911) calls.  
Sprint 411  
Dial 411 from your wireless phone to receive  
nationwide listings, movie listings and showtimes,  
restaurant reservations, and driving directions, as  
well as sports scores, stock quotes, and weather  
conditions. Spanish speaking operators available.  
Receive up to three phone numbers or pieces of  
information per call, and be automatically  
connected at no additional charge. Airtime and  
other charges apply.  
62  
   
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate  
Ring Tones  
You can set your phone to vibrate instead of  
making a sound when you receive all phone calls,  
Walkie-Talkie calls, Group Walkie-Talkie calls,  
Talkgroup calls, call alerts, message notifications,  
and Datebook reminders.  
To set the ring tone your phone makes when you  
receive phone calls, call alerts, message  
notifications, or Datebook reminders:  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones >  
3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the  
one you want to assign. Vibrate sets your phone  
to vibrate instead of making a sound; Silent sets  
your phone to neither vibrate nor make a sound.  
VibeAll.  
2 Set this option to On.  
Tip: Pressing the volume controls to turn down  
the volume as far as possible sets VibeAll  
to On.  
Tip: Highlighting a ring tone lets you hear it.  
4 Select the features you want to assign the ring  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound for some features but not others:  
tone to.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Select Vibrate from the list of ring tones.  
4 Select the features you want to set to make no  
sound.  
Note: This icon Mappears on the display if you  
set your phone to neither vibrate nor make  
a sound for phone calls.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Note: To set ring options for Walkie-Talkie calls,  
Group Walkie-Talkie calls, and Talkgroup  
calls, see “Setting Your Phone to Vibrate”  
on page 146.  
63  
           
Ring Tones  
These icons indicate how the ringer is set.  
Assigning Ring Tones to  
Contacts  
You can set the ring tone your phone makes when  
you receive phone calls or call alerts from  
someone you have stored in Contacts.  
Q
R
u
The phone always vibrates instead of making  
a sound.  
The phone vibrates instead of making a  
sound for phone calls.  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the  
one you want to assign.  
Group Walkie-Talkie calls, Talkgroup calls,  
and Walkie-Talkie calls are heard through the  
earpiece, not the speaker.  
These icons may appear at the same time.  
4 Select A Contact.  
5 Select the Contacts entry you want to assign the  
ring tone to.  
Ring and Vibrate  
To set your phone to ring and vibrate when you  
Note: You can assign some ring tones to  
Contacts from the media center as well.  
See “Assigning to Contacts” on page 102.  
receive phone calls or call alerts:  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and highlight  
the one you want to assign.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Assign w/Vibe.  
6 Select the features you want to set to ring and  
vibrate.  
Viewing Ring Tone  
Assignments  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Highlight any ring tone.  
4 Press m.  
7 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
5 Select Overview.  
This icon Sappears on the display.  
64  
         
Downloading More Ring Tones  
5 Select Memory Usage.  
6 Scroll to view ring tones assigned to features  
and Contact entries.  
Deleting custom ring tones frees memory.  
Note: Ring tones are stored in your phone using  
the same memory space used to store  
messages, Java application data, items  
accessible through the media center, and  
voice records created when your phone is  
in a call. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for ring tones.  
Downloading More Ring  
Tones  
If you want to use other ring tones you can  
download them into your phone for a fee. Check  
the Downloads menu option on your phone for a  
catalog of additional items available for purchase  
and download directly from your phone.  
Deleting Custom Ring Tones  
Deleting a ring tone from the list of ring tones  
deletes it from all parts of your phone, including the  
media center and Contacts.  
You can also go to www.sprint.com and sign on to  
your Nextel account for a wide selection of  
available ring tones and downloading instructions.  
Note: Ring tones may be downloaded only  
once. If you delete a ring tone from your  
phone, you must purchase it again to  
download it again.  
To delete a custom ring tone:  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll to the ring tone you want to delete.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Delete.  
6 Press A under Yes to confirm.  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for  
custom ring tones:  
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Highlight any ring tone.  
4 Press m.  
65  
             
Message Center Options  
After accessing the message center, select the  
option you want:  
Message Center  
The message center manages your messages.  
When you receive the following types of  
messages, you can access them through the  
message center:  
[Create Message] — begin creating an MMS  
message.  
Voice Mail — access voicemail messages you  
have received.  
Voicemail messages  
Net Alerts  
Inbox — access MMS messages you have  
received.  
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)  
messages  
Drafts — access MMS messages you have  
created and saved but not sent.  
Sent Items — access MMS messages you have  
created and sent.  
SMS messages  
You can listen to or view these messages, delete  
them, or continue to store them in the message  
center.  
Net Alert — access over-the-air alerts that you  
receive from Nextel.  
The message center also lets you create and send  
MMS messages. It stores messages you have sent  
and lets you save drafts of messages you are  
creating.  
SMS — access SMS messages you have  
received.  
Accessing the Message  
Center  
From the main menu, select Messages.  
66  
         
When you are on a phone call, you can receive  
message notifications for all types of messages  
except MMS messages. For other types of  
messages, your phone may sound a notification  
tone during the call or after you end the call,  
depending on how you set your notification  
options.  
Receiving Messages  
When you receive a voicemail message,  
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) message,  
Short Message Service (SMS) message, or Net  
alert, you have 2 ways to access the message:  
Respond to the message notification that  
appears when the message is received.  
Setting Notification Options  
Dismiss the message notification and access  
the message later through the message center.  
To control whether your phone sounds message  
notification tones while you are on phone calls:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > Notifications.  
Message Notifications  
When you receive a message, your phone notifies  
you with text on the display and a notification tone  
or vibration. You can access the message or  
dismiss the notification.  
2 Select the option you want:  
Receive All Tones sound during calls for  
all types of messages except MMS  
messages.  
If you dismiss the notification, the message is not  
deleted. It can be accessed through the message  
center.  
Message Mail Only Tones sound during  
calls for SMS messages; tones for all other  
types of messages are held until you end  
calls.  
Delay All Tones for all types of messages  
are held until you end calls.  
If you are not on a phone call when you receive a  
message, your phone sounds a notification tone  
every 30 seconds until you access the message,  
you dismiss the notification, or the alert time-out  
expires.  
Note: Delay All is the default setting.  
Tip: To set notification options during a call:  
Press m. Select In Call Setup >  
Notifications.  
67  
       
Receiving Messages  
Retrieving Messages  
All your messages are stored in the message  
center. The message center shows how many  
messages you have of each type.  
To retrieve your messages through the message  
center:  
1 From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 Scroll to the type of message you want to  
access.  
3 Press O or press A under the display option on  
the left.  
Note: In order for you to access voicemail for  
the first time you must access it by dialing  
into your voicemail box using your PTN. If  
there is already a message in your  
voicemail box, then you can access your  
voicemail through the message center.  
68  
 
Sending Unanswered Calls to  
Voicemail  
To send a phone call to voicemail instead of  
answering it:  
Voicemail Messages  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive a voicemail message, New  
Voice Mail Message appears on the display.  
Press e. -or-  
To call your voicemail and listen to the message:  
Press A under Call.  
Press A under No.  
To dismiss the message notification:  
Press O or press A under Back.  
If the caller leaves a message, this icon y  
appears on the display, reminding you that you  
have a new message.  
Accessing Voicemail From  
the Message Center  
From the main menu, select Messages > Voice  
Mail.  
69  
               
If you are calling from a phone other than your  
i615, dial your 10-digit Nextel PTN. When you hear  
the greeting, press * to access your voicemail  
box. The system will prompt you to enter your  
password. Enter the last seven digits of your Nextel  
PTN. For example: 5557777. This is your  
temporary password.  
Nextel® Voicemail  
Note: To receive voicemail messages, you must  
first set up your voicemail box.  
Note: If you are bringing your phone number  
from another carrier, we suggest you set  
up your voicemail box after the number  
you brought to Nextel is active on your  
Nextel phone and your temporary phone  
number is deactivated. If you set up your  
voicemail box prior to this, all messages  
and all settings (including your greeting  
and password) will be lost when the  
number you have brought to Nextel  
becomes active.  
You are in the main voicemail menu when you hear  
the options listed below.  
To play your messages, press 1. (This option  
plays only if you have new or saved messages.)  
To record a message, press 2.  
To change your greeting, press 3.  
To access your personal options, press 4.  
If you press * while you are in a sub-menu, you  
will go to the previous menu. If you press **, you  
will go to the main voicemail menu. From the main  
voicemail menu, press # to exit voicemail. At any  
time, you may end the call by pressing e.  
Setting Up Your Voicemail Box  
Using your i615 phone, dial your 10-digit Nextel  
Personal Telephone Number (PTN). For example:  
7035557777. Follow the system instructions to  
create a new 4- to 7-digit password, record your  
name, and record a greeting. When the system  
says, “Thank you for using Nextel Voicemail,” your  
mailbox is set up.  
Playing Messages  
When you receive a new voicemail message, you  
can either listen to it immediately by pressing A  
under Call, or later by pressing A under Back.  
These are options available while you are listening  
to your messages:  
70  
           
Changing Your Password  
Important: After exiting the voicemail session, you  
cannot recover deleted messages.  
Backup — press 1.  
Rewind to the beginning of the message —  
press 11.  
Changing Your Password  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 1 to modify password.  
Pause or continue the current message — press  
2.  
Fast forward — press 3.  
Fast forward to the end of the message — press  
33.  
4 Enter your new password. It must be 4- to 7-  
Play the date and time stamp — press 55.  
digits long.  
These options are available while a message is  
playing or after it has played:  
Note: It is important that you choose a number  
that is easy for you to remember, but hard  
for someone else to guess. Passwords  
using all the same digits, for example  
4,4,4,4 or a sequential series of digits,  
1,2,3,4, will not be accepted.  
Forward the message to another subscriber —  
press 6.  
Delete the message — press 7.  
Reply to a message — press 8.  
Save the message — press 9.  
Skip to the next message — press #.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Note: If you forget your password, contact  
Nextel Customer Service.  
Messages that are not saved or deleted remain in  
your mailbox as new messages. All messages are  
automatically deleted after 30 days.  
Recording Your Name  
When you send, reply to, or copy a message, your  
name response precedes the message. To record  
or re-record your name at any time:  
To retrieve deleted messages, press * 3. This  
option only applies to the current voicemail  
session. If you end the call, the messages will be  
permanently deleted.  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
71  
     
Nextel® Voicemail  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 3 to access the record your name option.  
4 Press 2 to record your name.  
Advanced Voicemail Features  
Multiple Greetings  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
You can create up to 5 different greetings and  
designate which greeting will be your active  
greeting at any given time. The greeting that was  
recorded during your initial voicemail box setup is  
greeting 1. This is your default active greeting.  
Recording Your Active Greeting  
You may want to include one or all of the following  
options in your greeting so that callers will know  
they are available.  
To access additional greetings, from the main  
voicemail menu, press 3 and follow the prompts.  
Press 1 to send a numeric message.  
Greetings Schedule  
Press 2 to send an operator-assisted message.  
(This option is available only if you are a  
subscriber of Operator Assisted Messaging.  
Contact Nextel Customer Service for more  
information.)  
You can choose to have your greetings  
automatically activated based on a pre-determined  
time schedule. By activating the Greeting  
Schedule, Greetings 1, 2, and 3 will automatically  
play according to the time schedule listed below.  
Press # to skip the greeting and record a  
message immediately.  
Greeting 1 Evenings and 5:00 pm – 7:59 am,  
To record or alter your greeting at any time:  
Weekends  
Monday – Friday  
24-hours, Saturday  
and Sunday  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 3 to  
change your greeting.  
2 Press 1 to play, press 2 to record or re-record,  
Greeting 2 Weekday  
Mornings  
8:00 am – 11:59 am  
Monday – Friday  
or press 7 to delete your active greeting.  
3 Record your greeting and press # when you  
have finished.  
4 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Greeting 3 Weekday  
Afternoons  
Noon – 4:59 pm  
Monday – Friday  
72  
     
Advanced Voicemail Features  
To activate the greeting schedule, from the main  
voicemail menu, press 3, then press 9 to activate  
your greeting schedule.  
Recording, Forwarding, and Replying  
to Messages  
These functions allow you to record and send,  
reply to, or forward a message to an assigned  
destination address or group list number. If you  
record a complete or partial message, but do not  
send it, Nextel Voicemail service will refer to this  
message as an “in preparation” message.  
Note: The greeting schedule, when on, will  
override any other greeting that you may  
set as active. If a greeting is not recorded,  
a system standard greeting will be played.  
Automatic Playback and Playback  
Order  
By default, the playback mode of your voicemail  
service is set to normal. This feature automatically  
plays and saves new messages when you log in.  
To activate automatic playback:  
To access additional greetings, from the main  
voicemail menu, press 2 and follow the prompts.  
Note: You can only send messages using this  
method to Nextel subscribers in your  
home market.  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
Delivery Options  
After you have created a message, you can assign  
the message to a category before you send it.  
Below is a list of the options that can be applied to  
a message:  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 2 to access playback preferences.  
4 Follow the prompts for automatic or normal  
playback.  
Urgent — Recipient will hear this message  
before other messages.  
Private — Recipient cannot copy the message  
to another mailbox or phone number.  
Notification of Non-Delivery You will be  
notified if the recipient has not listened to your  
message by a certain date and time.  
73  
Nextel® Voicemail  
Future Delivery You can specify a time and  
date (up to three months in advance) for the  
message to be delivered.  
Message Forwarding  
Note: You can only forward messages to Nextel  
subscribers in your home market.  
Note: All dates must have digits in the MM/DD  
format (2 digits for the month and 2 digits  
for the date). For example, January 2nd  
would be 0102.  
This feature allows you to program your phone to  
automatically forward incoming messages to  
another mailbox. There are two types of  
forwarding: notified and silent. Notified forwarding  
prompts the caller that the message will be  
forwarded. Silent forwarding does not prompt the  
caller that the message will be forwarded.  
Important: Once a message has been sent for  
future delivery, it cannot be retrieved or  
deleted.  
To set a special delivery option after recording your  
message, but before sending it, press 5 and follow  
the prompts.  
To modify forwarding options:  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
Working With Group Lists  
2 Press 5 to modify forwarding options, then  
follow the prompts.  
This feature enables you to create a list and assign  
it a unique name. Then, you can add mailbox  
numbers, group lists, or individuals. Once you  
create a list, you can send a voice message to  
everyone on the list by entering the group list  
number. You can have up to 40 group lists. Each  
list can hold up to 50 addresses.  
To set up a group list:  
1 From the main voicemail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
2 Press 2 to access your group lists and follow  
the prompts.  
74  
   
To go to the next page:  
Multimedia Messages  
Scroll right. -or-  
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you  
send and receive messages that may include text,  
pictures, and audio recordings. You can send and  
receive these messages from your phone, through  
any email account, and from www.sprint.com.  
Press #. -or-  
Scroll to the end of the page and select MORE.  
To go to the previous page:  
Scroll left. -or-  
Your phone's MMS address is your  
[email protected]. Your PTN is your  
Nextel 10-digit Personal Telephone Number.  
Press *.  
To open a message on the current page:  
Select the message you want to open. -or-  
Navigating the Inbox, Drafts,  
and Sent Items  
You can access MMS messages through the  
following options in the message center:  
Press the number on the keypad corresponding  
to the number of the message.  
Creating and Sending  
Messages  
Each message you create may contain the  
following fields:  
Inbox — MMS messages you have received  
Drafts — MMS messages you have created and  
saved but not sent  
Sent Items — MMS messages you have  
created and sent  
To — the phone numbers or email addresses of  
one or more recipients.  
The messages in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items  
are grouped in pages of 9 messages. Scroll to view  
the messages on a page.  
Message — the body of the message. This may  
include text, pictures, or audio recordings.  
Subject — the subject line.  
75  
                   
Multimedia Messages  
Attach — one or more attachments. These may  
be pictures and audio recordings, including  
pictures and voice records you create while  
creating the message.  
For information on ways to enter text from the  
keypad, see “Entering Text” on page 37.  
Message Size  
Cc — the phone numbers or email addresses of  
You can create and send messages of up to 100  
KB, including attachments.  
more recipients.  
Auto Replies — lets you insert up to seven  
possible replies the recipient can choose from  
when replying to your message.  
To see the size of a message you are creating:  
1 Scroll to any field in the message.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Message Size.  
Priority — sets the priority of the message to  
normal or high.  
Report — lets you receive a report confirming  
that your message was delivered.  
Sending or Canceling  
To send the message at any time after it has been  
addressed:  
Valid Until — sets a date after which no more  
attempts are made to deliver the message.  
Press A under Send. -or-  
To send a message, you must address it to at least  
one recipient. All other message fields are optional.  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send.  
You can fill in the message fields in any order.  
To cancel the message at any time:  
Entering Text  
In message fields that require you to enter text, you  
can begin entering the text from the keypad when  
the field is highlighted.  
At the message screen, press A under Cancel.  
-or-  
Press e to cancel the message and save it in  
Drafts.  
While entering text, you can always choose a text  
input mode from the context-sensitive menu.  
76  
Creating and Sending Messages  
When you are finished addressing the message,  
Creating a Message  
1 To begin creating a message:  
press A under Back.  
3 To enter or edit the body of the message:  
From the main menu, select Messages >  
[Create Message]. -or-  
Select Message.  
Note: If you have created a signature, the  
signature automatically appears in this  
field. Text you enter appears before your  
signature. See “Customizing MMS” on  
page 91.  
Select [Create Message] from Inbox, Drafts, or  
Sent Items. -or-  
Begin creating a message from Contacts, the  
recent calls list, or the idle screen. See “More  
Ways to Begin a Message” on page 80. -or-  
Enter text from the keypad. -or-  
Reply to a received message. See “Replying to  
a Message” on page 79.  
Use a Quick Note. See “Quick Notes” on page  
82. -or-  
2 To address the message:  
Insert a picture or audio recording. See  
“Inserting Pictures and Audio Recordings From  
the Media Center” on page 82.  
Select To.  
Enter the phone number or email address from  
the keypad and press O. Repeat this action to  
enter more phone numbers or email addresses.  
-or-  
When you are finished, press O.  
4 If you want to send the message now, press A  
under Send. -or-  
Select recipients from Contacts or the recent  
calls list. See “More Ways to Address a  
Message” on page 81.  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send. -or-  
To fill in more message fields, see “Adding More  
Message Options” on page 78.  
Tip: To remove a phone number or email  
address from the list of message recipients,  
scroll to the phone number or email  
address and press A under Remove.  
77  
Multimedia Messages  
When you are finished addressing the message,  
Adding More Message Options  
1 To view more message fields in a message you  
are creating, select MORE. -or-  
press A under Back.  
5 If you want to insert up to seven possible replies  
the recipient can choose from when replying to  
your message, select Auto Replies.  
Press A under More.  
2 If you want to create or edit the subject line:  
Select Subject.  
Enter text from the keypad. -or-  
Press A under QNotes to select up to seven  
Quick Notes. See “Quick Notes” on page 82.  
Enter text from the keypad. -or-  
6 If you want to set the priority of the message:  
Select Priority.  
Select a Quick Note. See “Quick Notes” on page  
82.  
When you are finished, press O.  
Select the priority you want.  
3 If you want to attach a picture or audio  
7 If you want to receive a report confirming that  
recordings, see “Attaching Pictures and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center” on page 83  
or “Attaching New Voice Records” on page 83.  
your message was delivered:  
Select Report > On Delivery.  
4 If you want to add more recipients in addition to  
those in the To field:  
8 If you want to set a date after which attempts to  
deliver the message end:  
Select Cc.  
Select Valid Until.  
Enter the phone number or email address from  
the keypad and press O. Repeat this action to  
enter more phone numbers or email addresses.  
-or-  
Select a date by scrolling or entering numbers.  
Press O. -or-  
To set no date, press A under No Date.  
Select recipients from Contacts or the recent  
calls list. See “More Ways to Address a  
Message” on page 81.  
78  
 
Creating and Sending Messages  
9 To send the message, press A under Send.  
-or-  
Cc — If you are sending a reply to all, some  
recipients may be in this field.  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send.  
To reply to a message:  
1 View the message you want to reply to. -or-  
Replying to a Message  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
You can reply to a received message while you are  
viewing it. If you have already viewed a message,  
you can also reply to it while it is highlighted in the  
message center. You cannot reply to unread  
messages.  
2 To reply to the sender only, press A under  
Reply. -or-  
To reply to the sender and all recipients: Press  
m. Select Reply All.  
For information on viewing received messages,  
see “Receiving a Message” on page 86 and  
“Viewing Received Messages From the Message  
Center” on page 87.  
3 A list of short phrases is displayed. Select any of  
these phrases to add it to the body of your  
messages. -or-  
Select [Create Reply] to begin the body of your  
message without using any of these phrases.  
When you reply to a message you received, some  
of the fields in your reply message are filled in  
automatically:  
4 Edit any message fields you want to change.  
To — the phone number or email address of the  
sender of the message you are replying to. If  
you are sending a reply to all, some recipients  
may be in this field.  
5 Send the message.  
Tip: To create new reply phrases to use in later  
reply message, see “Customizing MMS” on  
page 91.  
Message — the first 40 characters of the  
message you are replying to. Text you add to  
the body of your message appears above this.  
Subject — “Re:” followed by the subject line of  
the message you are replying to, if any.  
79  
 
Multimedia Messages  
Using Auto Replies  
From the Recent Calls List  
If the message you are replying to was sent with  
auto replies, it displays a numbered list of possible  
replies. Press the number of the reply you want to  
send. The reply will be sent immediately without  
any further action.  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the entry you  
want to send a message to.  
2 If the entry has more than one phone number  
stored, view the phone number you want to send  
the message to.  
3 Press A under Create. -or-  
More Ways to Begin a Message  
If Create is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Create.  
In addition to beginning a message from the  
message center, you can begin a message from  
Contacts, the recent calls list, the idle screen, or  
the Media Center.  
4 Create and send the message. The message is  
automatically addressed to the phone number  
you chose.  
From Contacts  
From the Idle Screen  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry  
containing the phone number or email address  
you want to send the message to.  
1 Using the keypad, enter the number you want to  
send a message to.  
2 Scroll left or right to view the Contacts types until  
you see the icon for the phone number or email  
address you want to send a message to.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Create. The message is automatically  
addressed to the phone number you chose.  
3 Press A under Create. -or-  
From the Media Center  
If Create is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Create Message.  
You can send pictures and audio recordings in  
MMS messages.  
4 Create and send the message. The message is  
automatically addressed to the phone number or  
email address you chose.  
1 From the Media Center, scroll to or select the  
item you want to include in a message.  
80  
         
Creating and Sending Messages  
2 Press A under Send. If you scroll to or select an  
item that cannot be sent in an MMS message,  
Send is not one of your options.  
3 Create and send the message. The item you  
selected is automatically included as an  
attachment.  
If Contcs is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Contacts.  
3 Select the entry containing the phone number or  
email address you want to send the message to.  
4 If the entry contains more than one phone  
number or email address, select the ones you  
want to send the message to.  
More Ways to Address a Message  
When you are filling in the To and Cc message  
fields, you can select recipients from Contacts and  
the recent calls list.  
When you are finished selecting items within the  
entry, press A under Done.  
5 When you are finished selecting entries, press  
A under Done.  
You can select more than one recipient from  
Contacts and the recent calls list. A checkmark  
appears next to each selected item.  
From the Recent Calls List  
When you select recipients from the recent calls  
list, phone calls are displayed.  
Tip: To deselect a selected item: Scroll to a  
selected item and press O.  
Walkie-Talkie calls are displayed only if the  
Walkie-Talkie number is stored in Contacts and its  
Contacts entry also contains a phone number or  
email address.  
From Contacts  
When you select recipients from Contacts,  
Contacts entries containing phone numbers or  
email addresses are displayed.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select To or Cc.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Recent Calls.  
Tip: You can search for an entry name as you  
would otherwise when viewing Contacts.  
See “Searching for a Name” on page 46.  
4 Select the entry containing the phone number or  
email address you want to send the message to.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select To or Cc.  
2 Press A under Contcs. -or-  
81  
     
Multimedia Messages  
5 If the entry contains more than one phone  
number or email address, select the ones you  
want to send the message to.  
Inserting Pictures and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center  
When you are filling in the Message field, you can  
insert pictures and audio recordings from the  
Media Center into the body of the message.  
When you are finished selecting items within the  
entry, press A under Done.  
6 When you are finished selecting entries, press  
A under Done.  
You can insert more than one of these items into a  
message. You can include text in the body of your  
message in addition to these items.  
Quick Notes  
Note: For information on how items inserted into  
the body of a message appear when a  
message is received, see “Embedded  
Objects and Attachments” on page 86.  
When you are filling in the Message and Subject  
message fields, you can add ready-made words or  
short phrases called Quick Notes. After you add  
these words or phrases, you can edit them as you  
would any other text.  
Inserting Items  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select Message or Subject.  
1 While you are filling in the Message field, press  
m.  
2 Press A under QNotes. -or-  
2 Select Insert Picture or Insert Audio.  
If QNotes is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Insert Quick Notes.  
A list of pictures and audio recordings that can  
be included in a message appears.  
3 Select the Quick Note you want to insert into the  
message.  
3 Select the picture or audio recording you want to  
insert.  
Tip: To create new Quick Notes to use in later  
messages, see “Customizing MMS” on  
page 91.  
Tip: To view or listen to the item before inserting  
it, highlight it and press A under Preview.  
82  
       
Creating and Sending Messages  
Removing an Inserted Item  
4 If you want to attach more items, select [New  
Attachment].  
To remove an item inserted into the body of the  
message you are creating:  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
1 Highlight the item you want to remove.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
Attaching New Voice Records  
While you are creating a message, you can create  
voice records and attach them to the message.  
Attaching Pictures and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center  
Creating a New Voice Record  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to any  
message field and press m. -or-  
You can attach one or more pictures and audio  
recordings from the Media Center.  
Select Attach > [New Attachment].  
Note: For information on how attachments  
appear when a message is received, see  
“Embedded Objects and Attachments” on  
page 86.  
2 Select Record Voice.  
3 Say the message you want to record into the  
microphone.  
4 When you are finished recording, press O or  
press A under Save.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done if  
Done is one of your options.  
Attaching Items  
1 While you are creating a message, select  
Attach > [New Attachment].  
2 Select Browse Picture or Browse Audio.  
The voice record is attached to the message and  
saved to the Media Center and the list of voice  
records.  
A list of pictures and audio recordings that can  
be included in a message appears.  
3 Select the picture or audio recording you want to  
attach.  
Tip: To view or listen to the item before  
attaching it, highlight it and press A under  
Preview.  
83  
   
Multimedia Messages  
4 Select Send.  
Removing an Attachment  
To remove an attachment in a message you are  
creating:  
Editing a Draft  
1 From the main menu, select Messages >  
Drafts.  
2 Select the draft you want to edit.  
3 Continue as you would when creating a  
message.  
1 While you are creating a message, select  
Attach.  
2 Scroll to the attachment you want to remove.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Unattach.  
Deleting a Draft  
Drafts  
When you send a draft, it is deleted from Drafts.  
While you are creating a message, you can save it  
To delete a message in Drafts without sending it:  
in Drafts before you send it.  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
You can view, edit, send, or delete saved drafts.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Saving a Message in Drafts  
1 While you are creating a message, press m.  
2 Select Save In Drafts.  
Drafts Icons  
M
w
L
Draft.  
You can continue to create the message. The  
version you saved in Drafts will not change.  
High priority.  
Sending a Draft  
Attachment.  
1 From the main menu, select Messages >  
Drafts.  
y
High priority with an attachment.  
2 Scroll to the draft you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
84  
       
Sent Items  
Checking Delivery Status  
If a message was successfully sent and you set the  
message to give a report confirming delivery, you  
can check the delivery status:  
Sent Items  
Messages you have sent or tried to send are  
stored in Sent Items.  
Forwarding Sent Items  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
Items.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to forward.  
3 Press m.  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
Items.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to view.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delivery Status.  
4 Select Forward.  
5 Edit and send your message.  
Deleting  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-  
You can add to and edit the message you are  
forwarding.  
View the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Resending  
If a message was not sent from your phone, you  
can resend it.  
Sent Items Icons  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
Items.  
t
v
w
L
Successfully sent.  
Unsuccessfully sent.  
High priority.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to resend.  
3 Press A under Resend.  
Note: If your message was sent successfully,  
Resend will not appear as an option.  
Attachment.  
85  
           
Multimedia Messages  
Embedded Objects and Attachments  
Messages may contain pictures or audio  
recordings as part of the body of the message or  
as attachments.  
z
y
High priority and locked.  
High priority with an attachment.  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive an MMS message, a message  
notification appears on the display.  
If a message contains pictures or audio recordings  
in the body of the message, highlight each picture  
or audio recording to view or play it.  
To view the message:  
If a message contains a picture or audio recording  
as an attachment, open the attachment to view the  
picture or play the audio recording.  
1 Press O or press A under Read.  
The message is downloaded from the message  
server.  
Opening Attachments  
To open an attachment.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to open.  
Attachments appear at the end of a message.  
2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
To dismiss the message notification, press A  
under Later.  
This icon wappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
3 Press O.  
Note: Attachments that are of an unknown type  
cannot be opened, but they can be  
deleted. See “Deleting Attachments” on  
page 90.  
Navigating a Message  
As you scroll through a message, numbers, email  
addresses, and website URLs are highlighted.  
Viewing a Slide Show  
Your phone can receive MMS messages  
containing slide shows.  
Pictures and audio recordings are also highlighted.  
86  
               
Viewing Received Messages From the Message Center  
A slide show may contain a series of pictures that  
displays in sequence. It may also include one or  
more audio recordings.  
If you have not viewed the message before, the  
message is downloaded from the message  
server.  
When you view a message containing a slide  
show, this icon i appears.  
3 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
To view a slide show in a message:  
Inbox Icons  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the slide show.  
3 Press O.  
u Unread message.  
T
Read message.  
To speed up the slide show, scroll right or scroll  
down.  
r Reply sent.  
N
O
Forwarded.  
To repeat the part of the slide show you have just  
viewed, scroll left or scroll up.  
Locked.  
To view the slide show again, press A under  
w
L
High priority.  
Restart.  
Attachment.  
Note: You can create and send MMS messages  
containing slide shows on  
x
z
y
{
Locked, with an attachment.  
High priority and locked.  
High priority with an attachment.  
High priority and locked, with an attachment.  
www.sprint.com.  
Viewing Received Messages  
From the Message Center  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Inbox.  
2 Select the message you want to read.  
87  
       
Multimedia Messages  
3 Select Forward.  
4 Create and send your message.  
Actions for Received  
Messages  
Embedded objects and attachments are included  
when you forward a message.  
Deleting  
Unread Messages  
Locking and Unlocking  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted  
until you unlock it.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 View the message you want to lock or unlock.  
-or-  
Read Messages  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-  
View the message you want to delete.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Lock Message or Unlock Message.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete Message.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Calling a Number in a Message  
If a message you receive contains a phone  
number, Walkie-Talkie number, or Talkgroup ID,  
you can call or send a call alert to that number.  
Replying  
See “Replying to a Message” on page 79.  
These numbers may appear in the From field, the  
To field, the Cc field, the subject line, or the body  
of the message.  
Forwarding  
1 View the message you want to forward. -or-  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
2 Press m.  
88  
           
Actions for Received Messages  
Making a Phone Call  
Storing Message Information to  
Contacts  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the phone number you want to call.  
3 Press s.  
If a message you receive contains a phone  
number, Walkie-Talkie number, Talkgroup ID, or  
an email address, you can store this information to  
Contacts.  
Making a Walkie-Talkie Call  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the Walkie-Talkie number you want to  
call.  
These numbers may appear in the From field, the  
To field, the Cc field, the subject line, or the body  
of the message.  
3 Press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the number or email address you want  
to save.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Save Number or Save Email.  
Sending a Call Alert  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the Walkie-Talkie number or Talkgroup  
ID you want to alert.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Alert.  
5 To store the number or email address as a new  
entry, select [New Contact]. -or-  
5 Press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
To store the number or email address to an  
existing entry, select the entry.  
Making a Talkgroup Call  
6 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number or email address.  
7 If you want to add more information to the entry,  
follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 42.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the Talkgroup ID you want to call.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Talkgroup.  
5 Press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
8 Press A under Done.  
89  
   
Multimedia Messages  
Going to a Website  
If a message contains one or more website URLs,  
you can go to the website.  
Deleting an Embedded Picture or  
Audio Recording  
To delete a picture or audio recording that is part of  
the body of a message you receive:  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the website URL you want to go to.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Go To Website.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the picture or audio recording you want  
to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete Picture or Delete Audio.  
Note: The entire URL must appear in the  
message. Otherwise, you cannot go to the  
website.  
Saving Attachments  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to save.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Save Attachment.  
Saving an Embedded Picture or  
Audio Recording  
To save a picture or audio recording that is part of  
the body of a message you receive:  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the picture or audio recording you want  
to save.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Save Picture or Save Audio.  
Pictures and audio recordings are saved to the  
Media CenterMedia Center.  
Note: Some types of pictures and audio  
recordings can be viewed or played, but  
not saved to the Media Center.  
Pictures and audio recordings are saved to the  
Media Center.  
Deleting Attachments  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
Note: Some types of pictures and audio  
recordings can be viewed or played, but  
not saved to the Media Center.  
90  
         
Customizing MMS  
4 Select Delete Attachment.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Deleting Slide Shows  
1 Highlight the slide show or view the slide show.  
2 Press m.  
Saving Slide Shows  
When viewing a slide show in a message you have  
received, you can save the parts of the slide show.  
3 Select Delete Slideshow.  
Customizing MMS  
The Setup menu lets you customize MMS for your  
phone:  
If the slide show contains pictures, you can save  
each picture as it appears. If the slide show  
contains audio recordings, you can save each  
audio recording at any time during the slide show.  
Friendly Name — Enter text here to create a  
friendly name. Your friendly name is the name  
displayed in the From field on other iDEN  
phones when they receive messages from you.  
Saving Pictures  
1 View the slide show.  
2 When the picture you want to save appears,  
press m.  
Signature — Enter text here to create a  
signature. Your signature is text that is  
automatically inserted at the end of all  
messages you create. You can edit the text  
before sending the message.  
3 Select Save Picture.  
Saving Audio  
1 View the slide show.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Save Audio.  
4 If the slide show contains more than one audio  
recording, a list of the audio recordings appears.  
Select the audio recording you want to save.  
Quick Notes — lets you create new Quick  
Notes and edit or delete Quick Notes you have  
created.  
Replies — lets you create new reply phrases  
and edit or delete reply phrases you have  
created.  
91  
     
Multimedia Messages  
Cleanup — controls how long messages remain  
in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are  
deleted. See “Setting the Clean-up Option” on  
page 93.  
Editing  
You can edit only Quick Notes and reply phrases  
you have created.  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
To access the Setup menu:  
1 From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 With [Create Message] highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
2 Select the Quick Note or reply phrase you want  
to edit.  
3 Edit the text.  
4 When you are finished, press O.  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using MMS.  
Deleting  
You can delete only Quick Notes and reply phrases  
you have created.  
New Quick Notes and Reply Phrases  
To delete a Quick Note or reply phrase:  
Creating  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
2 Scroll to the Quick Note or reply phrase you  
2 Select [New Quicknote] or [New Reply]. -or-  
want to delete.  
Press A under New.  
3 Press A under Delete.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
3 Enter text from the keypad.  
4 When you are finished, press O.  
To delete all Quick Notes or all reply phrases you  
have created:  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
2 Press m.  
92  
 
Customizing MMS  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Custom — Lets you create a clean-up option of  
up to 99 messages or 99 days.  
For the Inbox  
Setting the Clean-up Option  
1 From the Setup menu, select Cleanup > Inbox.  
2 Choose a clean-up option.  
3 To automatically delete messages now, press O  
or press A under Yes. -or-  
The clean-up option controls how long messages  
remain in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are  
deleted. You set the clean-up option for the Inbox  
and Sent Items separately.  
To delete messages later, press A under No.  
The clean-up option deletes only read, unlocked  
messages.  
For Sent Items  
Clean-up Options  
1 From the Setup menu, select Cleanup > Sent  
Items.  
Off — Messages are never automatically  
deleted.  
2 Choose a clean-up option.  
3 To automatically delete messages now, press O  
5 Messages — If you have more than 5  
messages, messages are deleted in the order  
they were received, starting with the oldest, until  
5 are left.  
10 Messages — If you have more than 10  
messages, messages are deleted in the order  
they were received, starting with the oldest, until  
10 are left.  
or press A under Yes. -or-  
To delete messages later, press A under No.  
Choosing to Delete Messages Later  
If you choose to delete messages later, rather than  
at the time you set the clean-up option, the type of  
clean-up option you set determines when  
messages are deleted.  
1 Day — Messages are deleted if they are older  
than 1 day.  
3 Days — Messages are deleted if they are  
older than 3 days  
If you set an option that cleans up messages  
according to how many you have, messages are  
deleted when you exit the message center after  
setting the option.  
93  
   
Multimedia Messages  
If you set an option that cleans up messages  
according to how old the messages are, messages  
are deleted when you power on your phone.  
Note: Messages are stored in your phone using  
the same memory space used to store  
Java application data, items accessible  
through the Media Center, and voice  
records created when your phone is in a  
call. Deleting some of these other items  
frees memory for messages.  
Managing Memory  
All messages in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items  
share the same memory space.  
Deleting All Messages  
To delete all read, unlocked messages from the  
Inbox, all messages in Drafts, or all successfully  
sent messages in Sent Items:  
Note: The content of a message in the Inbox is  
not stored in your phone’s memory until  
the message is read. Unread messages  
use very little memory.  
To view your used memory, free memory, and  
memory capacity:  
1 Scroll to Inbox, Draft, or Sent Items and press  
Ok.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 With [Create Message] highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Setup > Memory Size.  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using MMS.  
To free memory, delete messages.  
To delete many messages at once, see “Deleting  
All Messages” on page 94.  
To set messages to be deleted automatically, see  
“Setting the Clean-up Option” on page 93.  
94  
       
3 To keep the message, press O. -or-  
SMS Messages  
Short Message Service (SMS) messages are short  
text messages, also called text and numeric  
messages. You can send SMS messages through  
any email account or on www.sprint.com.  
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the  
message, then press A under Delete.  
To dismiss the message notification:  
Press A under Back.  
Your phone receives SMS messages sent to its  
SMS address, but does not send SMS messages.  
This icon wappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
Your phone's SMS address is your  
[email protected]. Your PTN is your 10-digit  
Personal Telephone Number.  
Reading From the Message Center  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > SMS.  
2 Select the message you want to read.  
3 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
If your phone is powered off when you receive a  
message, your phone notifies you the next time  
you power it on. If you are out of your coverage  
area, your phone alerts you when you return to  
your coverage area.  
4 To keep the message, press O. -or-  
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the  
message, then press A under Delete.  
Your phone attempts to deliver these messages for  
up to 7 days.  
Calling and Storing Numbers  
If an SMS message you receive contains a phone  
number, you can call that number by pressing s  
while viewing the message.  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive a text and numeric message,  
New Text Message appears on the display.  
To view the message:  
If an SMS message you receive contains a phone  
number, Walkie-Talkie number, or Talkgroup ID,  
you can call or send a call alert to that number, or  
store that number to Contacts. Press m while  
viewing the message to access these options.  
1 Press A under Read.  
2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
95  
         
SMS Messages  
To call the number, select Call Back.  
To send a call alert, select Alert, then press the  
Walkie-Talkie button.  
To make a Talkgroup call, select Talkgroup, then  
press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
To store the number to Contacts, select Store  
Number.  
96  
Web Service — access the wireless Internet  
from your phone for information and services  
from top wireless sites. Other services and  
features available include access to any  
wireless Internet address. Conduct topic and  
key word searches, and bookmark sites and  
applications.  
Wireless Data Services  
You can use your phone to access a suite of  
wireless data products known as Wireless Data  
Services. Services include Multimedia Messaging,  
Instant Messaging, Wireless Web, Address Book,  
Mobile Email and more.  
Downloads — personalize your phone with  
downloadable ringers, applications, games, and  
screen savers.  
Most services require the activation of a rate plan  
with Wireless Data Services or the separate  
purchase of a Wireless Data Services plan. To  
order, call 1-800-NEXTEL6 or contact your Nextel  
sales representative.  
* Wireless Data Services are available in the continental U.S.,  
Canada, Mexico, Brazil, Argentina, and Peru. Wireless Data  
Services usage outside of the continental U.S. may incur  
additional charges. See www.sprint.com for details.  
Address Book — program your Contacts from  
the Internet.  
Mobile Email — access personal and office  
email accounts from your phone (includes  
access to AOL®, MSN®, and Yahoo!® mail).  
Instant Messaging — send and receive instant  
messages through a phone-based interface  
(includes access to AOL® Instant Messenger,  
MSN Messenger®, and Yahoo! Messenger®).  
Wireless Data Services  
Multimedia Messaging Service — send and  
receive messages that may include text,  
pictures, and audio recordings. You can send  
and receive these messages from your phone,  
through an email account, and from  
Accessing Wireless Data  
Services From Your Phone  
You must first enable security, on your phone, to  
receive Wireless Data Services. Enabling security  
secures your data during over-the-air transmission  
to and from your phone. See “Enabling Security”  
on page 6.  
www.sprint.com. For additional information, see  
“Multimedia Messages” on page 75.  
97  
                           
Wireless Data Services  
To access Multimedia Messaging:  
Many screens will require you to enter text. For  
information on entering text, see “Entering Text” on  
page 37.  
Press m to access the main menu and select  
Messages > Inbox.  
* To access your office or corporate email, address book and other  
related services from your Nextel phone, you will need to  
download the Desk Assistant program to your office PC. If you  
have an IT Administrator, you may need to review your  
company's policy for desktop software and determine any  
necessary technical or security requirements.  
To access Wireless Data Services:  
1 Press m to access the main menu and select  
Net.  
Your Wireless Data Services home page  
displays.  
Navigation Keys  
2 Choose the service you want to access.  
Home — Press e to return to your home page.  
To access the Web:  
Tip: Press e twice to return to your phone's idle  
screen.  
Select Web Sites, Downloads&Services, or  
Search.  
Back — Press * to return to a previous screen.  
To access Address Book:  
Tip: While navigating through Wireless Data  
Services screens, a number may appear to  
the left of the application or topic you want  
to access. Press the corresponding number  
on the keypad for quicker access to that  
application or topic.  
Select Business Tools > Address Book.  
To access personal and office email accounts:  
Select Email and IM > Mobile Email.  
To access Instant Messaging:  
When transmitting highly personal or sensitive  
data, such as a credit card number, this iconE  
appears, indicating that the data is encrypted  
during transmission.  
Select Email and IM > IM.  
To access Personalization catalogs:  
Select Downloads.  
Note: You may be asked to (re)enable security  
as Nextel adds new services or upon your  
return to the U.S. after traveling.  
98  
   
Guides and Demos  
Guides and Demos  
Quick Start Guides and demos with more details  
on how to use your Wireless Data Services can be  
accessed on www.sprint.com  
99  
   
Viewing the Media Center  
To access the Media Center:  
Media Center  
The Media Center lets you access pictures and  
audio recordings that you have saved or  
downloaded.  
From the main menu, select Media Center.  
Scroll to view the items in the Media Center.  
All pictures saved in your phone can be accessed  
through the Media Center.  
Choosing Thumbnail View or List  
View  
You can set the Media Center to show a thumbnail  
of each picture as you view the list of items or show  
the list of items without thumbnails.  
The following audio recordings can be accessed  
through the Media Center:  
Voice records created when your phone was not  
in a call  
Musical ring tones in the list of ring tones  
To change views:  
Audio recordings saved from MMS messages  
you received  
Audio recordings you downloaded to your phone  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set View.  
Pictures and audio recordings in the Media Center  
can be sent in MMS messages. See “Multimedia  
Messages” on page 75.  
4 Select Plain List View or Thumbnail List View.  
Filtering by Media Type  
Note: You can transfer pictures from your phone  
to your computer using a data cable and  
software you can download from  
www.sprint.com.  
You can set the Media Center to show all items,  
only pictures, only audio recordings, or only video*.  
* While your phone does not record video, certain Java applications  
cause video to be accessible in the Media Center. Contact Nextel  
Customer Service for more information about such Java  
applications.  
Setting Filtering  
1 Access the Media Center.  
100  
           
Forward Locked Items  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Filter.  
4 Select All, Pictures, Audio, or Video.  
With an item selected, scroll up or down to access  
the items that appeared before and after it in the  
list.  
Tip: You can also scroll left or right, or press *  
or #, to scroll through these options while  
viewing the list of items.  
Sorting by Time or Name  
You can set the Media Center to sort items by the  
time the item was created or by the name of the  
item.  
Keeping the Last Filter Setting  
You can set the Media Center to show all items  
every time you access it or to keep the filtering  
setting you had when you last viewed it.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
4 Select Sort.  
5 Select By Time or By Name.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
4 Select Remember Filter to keep the filtering  
setting you had when you last viewed the Media  
Center. -or-  
When you receive your phone, the Media Center is  
set to sort items by time.  
Forward Locked Items  
Select Off to show all items every time you  
access the Media Center.  
Some items saved to the Media Center from MMS  
messages or by downloading may be forward  
locked. This means you cannot send them to  
anyone. You cannot remove forward locking from  
an item.  
When you receive your phone, the Media Center is  
set to show all items every time you access it.  
Accessing Items Listed  
To access a picture or audio recording, select it  
from the list of items in the Media Center.  
Forward locked items cannot be sent in MMS  
messages and cannot be uploaded from your  
phone.  
101  
   
Media Center  
Forward locked items are usually copyright  
protected.  
To see a larger or smaller view of the picture you  
are viewing:  
When you view items in the Media Center, one of  
these icons appears next to each forward locked  
item:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Zoom.  
3 Select the zoom option you want.  
Forward locked.  
If the picture does not fit in the display, scroll left  
and right and up and down to view different parts of  
the picture.  
f
Forward lock and locked.  
c
Sending in a Message  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to include  
in a message.  
When an item is locked, it cannot be deleted from  
the Media Center. See “Locking Items” on page  
104. Locking an item has no effect on its forward  
locking.  
2 Press A under Send.  
3 Create and send the message. The picture you  
selected is automatically included as an  
attachment and as the message subject.  
Pictures  
The Media Center lets you view pictures, send  
them in MMS messages, assign them to Contacts  
entries, or set them as your phone’s wallpaper.  
Assigning to Contacts  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to assign  
to a Contacts entry.  
Viewing  
To view a picture, select it from the list of items in  
the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set As Caller ID.  
If your phone is set to show thumbnails, a  
thumbnail of each picture appears next to the  
picture in the list of items. If your phone is not set to  
show thumbnails, this icon g appears next to the  
picture.  
4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
To store the number to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
102  
         
Audio Recordings  
Only entries that include phone numbers are  
displayed. This icon g appears next to entries  
that have pictures assigned.  
Playing  
To play an audio recording, select it from the list of  
items in the Media Center.  
5 If you selected an entry with a picture assigned,  
press O or press A under Yes to overwrite the  
assigned picture. -or-  
This icon a appears next to each audio recording  
in the list of items.  
Tip: When viewing the list of items in the Media  
Center, you can scroll left or right, or press  
* or #, to change the type of media that is  
displayed in the list.  
Press A under No to return to the list of entries  
without overwriting the assigned picture.  
Setting as Wallpaper  
To stop the audio recording before it has finished  
playing:  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to set as  
wallpaper.  
Note: Pictures sent to you in MMS messages  
Press O. -or-  
cannot be set as wallpaper.  
Scroll left.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set As Wallpaper.  
To restart the audio recording, scroll right.  
When you play an audio recording, an animated  
image appears on the display.  
Note: If you later set your wallpaper to change  
automatically, the picture is included. See  
“Wallpaper” on page 147.  
Sending in a Message  
1 Scroll to or select the audio recording you want  
to include in a message.  
Audio Recordings  
The Media Center lets you play audio recordings,  
send them in MMS messages, and assign them to  
Contacts entries.  
2 Press A under Send.  
3 Create and send the message. The audio  
recording you selected is automatically included  
as an attachment.  
103  
       
Media Center  
Assigning to Contacts  
To assign an audio recording in the Media Center  
as the ring tone for a Contacts entry:  
Locking Items  
When you lock an item in the Media Center, it  
cannot be deleted until you unlock it.  
1 Scroll to or select the audio recording you want  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to lock or  
unlock.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Lock to lock the item. -or-  
to assign.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Assign As Ringer.  
4 Select the Contacts entry you want to assign the  
ring tone to.  
Select Unlock to unlock the item.  
Note: You cannot assign a voice record as the  
When you view items in the Media Center, one of  
these icons appears next to each locked item:  
ring tone for a Contacts entry.  
Renaming Items  
Locked.  
R
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to rename.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Rename.  
5 Delete the item’s name and enter a new name.  
6 Press O.  
Forward lock and locked.  
c
Deleting Items  
Deleting items from the Media Center deletes them  
from all parts of your phone, including the list of  
ring tones, the list of voice records, and Contacts.  
Deleting an Item  
1 Scroll to or select the item you want to delete.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete.  
104  
           
Managing Memory  
Note: Items accessible through the Media  
4 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Center are stored in your phone using the  
same memory space used to store  
messages, Java applications data, and  
voice records created when your phone is  
in a call. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for media.  
Deleting All Items  
You can delete all unlocked items currently in view,  
depending on how Media Center filtering is set.  
See “Filtering by Media Type” on page 100. If  
filtering is set to show all types of Media Center  
items, all unlocked items are deleted.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Managing Memory  
To view your used memory, free memory, and  
memory capacity:  
1 Access the Media Center. -or-  
Scroll to or select any item in the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Memory Usage.  
To free memory, delete items in the Media Center.  
105  
   
You cannot talk or listen on a Walkie-Talkie call  
while a picture is being transmitted. Other  
activities, such as searching for a picture, do not  
prevent you from talking or listening.  
Using Nextel Direct  
SendSM  
Direct Send lets you exchange pictures, My Info,  
and contact information with other phones that  
have this capability. You do this through  
Walkie-Talkie calls.  
1 While in a Walkie-Talkie call, press A under  
Browse.  
A list of pictures that can be included in a  
Walkie-Talkie call appears.  
Direct Send cannot be used during Talkgroup calls.  
Nextel Direct Send Picture cannot be used during  
Talkgroup calls or Group Walkie-Talkie calls.  
2 Select the picture you want to send.  
3 Press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
picture.  
Sending a Picture  
4 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily interrupted  
while a picture is transmitted.  
5 When prompted, press the Walkie-Talkie button  
to resume the Walkie-Talkie call.  
When you send a picture using Direct Send, the  
picture you sent appears on the display of the  
phone you are engaged in the Walkie-Talkie call  
with, is saved by that phone, and then is accessible  
through that phone’s Media Center.  
Note: The first time you send a stored picture  
after turning the phone on, the message  
Messaging Fees May Apply appears  
and you are prompted to respond. Press  
A under Accept to send the picture.  
Press A under or Reject to not send the  
picture.  
Sending a Picture During a Call  
You can send a picture at any time during a  
Walkie-Talkie call, whether you made or received  
the call*.  
* Additional charges may apply.  
106  
     
Receiving a Picture  
7 When prompted, press the Walkie-Talkie button  
Starting a Call by Sending a Picture  
You can start a call by choosing a stored picture  
from Media Center.  
to resume the Walkie-Talkie call.  
Receiving a Picture  
When someone sends you a picture using Direct  
Send, your phone emits a tone or vibrates and a  
message appears on the display asking you if you  
want to accept the picture.  
To do this, you must have the Walkie-Talkie  
number and IP address of the person you want to  
send to stored in your Contacts.  
Tip: When a person sends you My Info from his  
or her phone, including his or her  
Pictures you receive are saved to your phone’s  
memory and are accessible through the Media  
Center.  
Walkie-Talkie number and IP address, you  
can then easily store this information to  
Contacts from the recent calls list.  
When you receive a picture, it appears every time  
you are in a Walkie-Talkie call with the person who  
sent it unless you delete the picture from the Media  
Center. This occurs for the last 20 people who sent  
you pictures.  
1 From the Media Center, scroll to or select the  
picture you want to send in a Walkie-Talkie call.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Direct Send Picture.  
A list of names from Contacts appears. These  
names have Walkie-Talkie numbers and IP  
addresses stored.  
Accepting a Picture  
1 When you see the message asking you if you  
want to accept the picture, press A under Yes.  
2 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily interrupted  
while a picture is transmitted.  
3 When prompted, press the Walkie-Talkie button  
to resume the Walkie-Talkie call.  
4 Select the name of the person you want to send  
the picture to.  
5 Press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
picture.  
6 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily interrupted  
while a picture is transmitted.  
107  
   
Using Nextel Direct SendSM  
Note: The first time you accept a stored picture  
after turning the phone on, the message  
Messaging Fees May Apply appears  
and you are prompted to respond. Press  
A under Accept to accept the picture.  
Press A under or Reject to not accept the  
picture.  
Sending My Info and Contact  
Information  
When you send My Info or contact information  
using Direct Send, the information you send  
appears on the display of the phone you are  
engaged in the Walkie-Talkie call with. After the  
call, the information appears in the recent calls list  
of that phone.  
Tip: If you want to stop the transmission before it  
is finished, press A under Cancel.  
Declining a Picture  
Sending My Info  
When you see the message asking you if you  
You can control what portion of the information in  
My Info is sent and whether it is sent automatically  
in every Walkie-Talkie call or only when you  
choose to send it. See “Setting Sending Options”  
on page 112.  
want to accept the picture, press A under No.  
The picture is not transmitted.  
Setting Picture Capability  
To turn your phone’s ability to send and receive  
pictures in Walkie-Talkie calls on or off:  
Tip: When you send My Info, certain  
information, such as your email address or  
fax number, cannot be included. To send  
complete contact information, create an  
entry for yourself in Contacts and send.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
Options > Direct Send Picture.  
2 Select On or Off.  
Sending Information During a Call  
This setting does not affect your phone’s ability to  
send and receive My Info or contact information.  
1 While in a Walkie-Talkie call, press m.  
2 Select Direct Send My Info.  
3 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
information.  
108  
     
Sending My Info and Contact Information  
Starting a Call by Sending Information  
2 Select Contacts or Recent Calls.  
3 Scroll to the Contacts entry or item in the recent  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Direct Send My Info.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the Walkie-Talkie  
number you want to send the information to. -or-  
calls list you want to send.  
4 Press m.  
5 If you chose the Contacts list in step 2, select  
Transfer > Send via PTT. -or-  
If you chose the recent calls list in step 2, select  
Send Contact.  
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
6 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
information.  
5 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
information.  
Starting a Call by Sending Contact Information  
1 From Contacts or the recent calls list, scroll to or  
Sending Contact Information  
You can send contact information by selecting a  
Contacts entry or an item from the recent calls list.  
select the entry you want to send.  
2 Press m.  
3 If you chose the Contacts list in step 1, select  
Transfer > Send via PTT. -or-  
Contacts entries that contain only addresses  
cannot be sent. When Contacts entries are  
received, they do not include ring tones or pictures.  
If you chose the recent calls list in step 1, select  
Send Contact.  
These items can be sent from the recent calls list:  
4 Use the keypad to enter the Walkie-Talkie  
number you want to send. -or-  
Contact information sent from other phones  
Calls to or from numbers stored in your Contacts  
list  
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
Sending Contact Information During a Call  
1 While in a Walkie-Talkie call, press m.  
109  
   
Using Nextel Direct SendSM  
5 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the Walkie-Talkie button to send the  
information.  
Receiving My Info or Contact  
Information  
When you receive My Info or contact information  
from another phone, an icon appears on the  
display:  
My Info.  
j
d
Contact information.  
To view the information while still in the  
Walkie-Talkie call:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select View Contact.  
You can also view My Info from other phones on  
the recent calls list. See “Recent Calls” on page 34.  
110  
   
IP1 Address and IP2 Address — the IP  
addresses you use to access the Internet with  
your phone.  
My Info  
My Info lets you view information about your phone  
number and Walkie-Talkie number and send this  
information to other phones.  
Circuit Data — the number you use if you want  
to use your phone to transfer circuit data. See  
“Using Your Phone as a Modem” on page 57.  
You receive this number from Nextel.  
Viewing My Info  
Note: If you request equipment-related  
transactions on your account, Nextel  
Customer Service may require you to  
provide specific information about your  
phone. By pressing m anytime while in  
My Info, a submenu will appear that  
includes your phone's service status, unit  
information, and phone identification  
numbers including IMEI, SIM ID, and  
Serial Number (SN). Please be prepared  
to supply the representative with this  
information when requesting these types  
of transactions.  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Scroll to see the entire screen.  
The My Info screen contains:  
My Name — You can enter your name here.  
Line 1 and Line 2 — your phone numbers for  
phone lines 1 and 2. Each number appears  
when you receive your alert notification after  
enabling security on your phone.  
Walkie-Talkie — Your Walkie-Talkie number is  
the number that others use to contact you using  
Walkie-Talkie calls. This number appears when  
you receive your alert notification after enabling  
security on your phone.  
Editing My Info  
Group ID — the number of the Talkgroup you  
To edit My Info to enter or change the text that  
have joined.  
appears in My Name:  
Carrier IP — the IP address assigned to Nextel.  
This number appears when you register for  
packet data services.  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press A under Edit.  
3 Select Name.  
111  
             
My Info  
4 Enter the name you want to appear. When you  
4 A checkmark appears next to the fields that will  
be sent. To add or remove the checkmark,  
select the field.  
are finished, press O.  
You can also edit the information in Line 1, Line 2,  
and Ckt., but your changes are only temporary.  
The next time your phone registers on the network,  
your actual phone numbers and circuit data  
number appear again in My Info.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Automatic Sending  
To control whether your information is sent  
automatically:  
Setting Sending Options  
Your phone can send information in My Info to  
other phones that have this capability.  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Direct Send Setup > AutoSend.  
You can control what portion of the information in  
My Info is sent and whether it is sent automatically  
in every Walkie-Talkie call or only when you  
choose to send it.  
4 To set your information to be sent automatically,  
set this option to On. -or-  
To set your information to be sent only when you  
choose to send it, set this option to Off.  
Information Sent  
The information your phone sends always includes  
My Name and Walkie-Talkie.  
Note: When you receive your phone, it set to  
send your information automatically.  
It may include Line 1, Line 2, and Carrier IP,  
depending on how you set your sending options.  
To change which fields are sent:  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Direct Send Setup > Info To Send.  
112  
     
Understanding Bluetooth® Access Settings  
Understanding Bluetooth®  
Access Settings  
A Bluetooth device can have either Automatic or  
ask security access. The first time a Bluetooth  
device connects to your i615 phone, you must  
grant the device permission to connect. You can  
then change the access setting of the device to  
either Automatic or ask.  
Bluetooth®  
Your i615 phone is a Bluetooth device. Bluetooth  
devices create seamless voice and data  
connections with other Bluetooth devices, such as  
another Bluetooth phone, a Bluetooth pen,  
headset, or desktop adapter. These connections  
are made wirelessly.  
You can use your i615 phone to send information  
such as Contacts entries, Datebook events, and  
pictures to another Bluetooth device.  
If you set a device to Automatic, then that device  
can connect automatically to your phone when it is  
in range. If you set a device to ask, then that device  
must request permission before it can connect to  
your phone.  
Devices must be within 32 feet (10 meters) of your  
phone to be recognized.  
Note: This measurement represents optimal  
conditions. Actual conditions may require  
you to position your phone closer.  
Devices are automatically granted permission  
during the 10 seconds after bonding. For more  
information about bonding, see “Bluetooth® Bonds”  
on page 115.  
You can only connect your phone to one device at  
a time.  
The default for hands-free devices, such as  
Bluetooth headsets, is Automatic.  
Setting Your Phone for  
Bluetooth®  
You can configure the following aspects of  
Bluetooth:  
Power  
113  
             
Bluetooth®  
Device name  
3 Press O.  
Voice recognition and dialing  
Setting Voice Dialing  
Some Bluetooth devices use voice dialing. When  
you receive your phone, Bluetooth voice dialing is  
turned off.  
Turning Bluetooth® On or Off  
You can turn power to your phone’s Bluetooth  
feature on or off. While Bluetooth power is on, your  
phone can communicate with other devices.  
To activate voice dialing for Bluetooth:  
You can turn off Bluetooth if you want to prolong  
battery life or you enter an area where Bluetooth is  
prohibited.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Voice Dial.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
The default setting is Off.  
Accessing Bluetooth®  
From the main menu, select Bluetooth. -or-  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Power.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
While in a call, press m. Select Use Bluetooth.  
Renaming Your Phone  
Note: If Bluetooth power is set to Off on your  
phone, you will be prompted to  
temporarily turn power on in order to use  
Bluetooth.  
Bluetooth devices are listed by their Bluetooth  
addresses unless you name them. Your i615  
phone comes with a default device name of  
“Motorola Phone”. Renaming your i615 phone with  
a unique device name makes it easier for you to  
distinguish your phone from other Bluetooth  
devices.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Name.  
2 Enter the name you want for your phone.  
114  
         
Making a Bluetooth® Connection  
Making a Bluetooth®  
Connection  
Note: You must grant the device’s request in  
order to receive information from the  
device on your phone.  
The following sections cover how to connect your  
phone to another Bluetooth device.  
To start discoverable mode, from the main  
menu, select Bluetooth > Find Me.  
Note: Some Bluetooth devices only have full  
functionality when DTMF dialing is set to  
On. See “Phone Calls Features” on  
page 150.  
Discovering Bluetooth® Devices  
To have your phone search for Bluetooth devices:  
From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Hands  
Free > [Find Devices].  
Sharing Your Phone’s Bluetooth®  
Address  
To bond with your phone, devices must have your  
phone’s Bluetooth address. To find devices that  
you want to bond with, you can make your phone  
discoverable, so that other devices learn your  
phone’s Bluetooth address. You can also have  
your phone search for Bluetooth devices to learn  
their addresses.  
A list of hands-free devices displays. Devices  
that do not have a name are listed by their  
Bluetooth address.  
To stop the search and go to the list of found  
devices, press A under Stop.  
To stop the search and return to the previous  
screen, press A under Cancel.  
Bluetooth® Bonds  
Allowing Bluetooth® Devices to Find Your  
Phone  
A bond is an encryption key that is generated when  
two Bluetooth devices exchange a common PIN.  
This key verifies the identity of each device, and  
encrypts any data transferred between the devices.  
Once the PIN is exchanged, the devices do not  
have to be in discoverable mode in order to  
exchange information. You only need to create a  
bond once between two devices.  
To let devices find your phone and its Bluetooth  
address, place your phone in discoverable mode.  
Discoverable mode lasts for 60 seconds. During  
this time, other devices that are within range can  
detect your phone. You can then choose to grant  
or deny each device’s request to bond.  
115  
               
Bluetooth®  
If you search for devices and you select a device  
that you are currently bonded with from the list of  
found devices, then the current bond with that  
device will be voided. You will have to re-establish  
the bond.  
To create a bond between your phone and another  
device:  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth.  
2 If you want to create a bond and connect with  
the given device, select Hands Free > [Find  
Devices]. -or-  
Your i615 requires that you create a bond in order  
to connect with another device. However, you can  
choose to establish bonds with devices without  
connecting.  
If you want to create a bond to have it available  
for future use, select Link to Devices.  
3 Select the device you want.  
4 Enter a PIN.  
5 Press A under Ok.  
6 If necessary, enter the same PIN for the other  
device.  
Note: Devices are automatically granted  
permission during the 10 seconds after  
bonding.  
Bluetooth® PINs  
Bluetooth devices exchange PINs in order to  
establish encrypted transfers between them. When  
prompted, enter the Bluetooth PINs.  
7 Select Bond.  
Connecting to a Stored Device  
If you have previously connected to a device, the  
device will be stored on your phone so you can  
connect with it easily.  
Some Bluetooth devices ship with Bluetooth PINs.  
Please refer to your Bluetooth device’s user guide  
to locate this information.  
If a device ships without a Bluetooth PIN, then you  
can enter any PIN for that device. To establish a  
connection to that device, enter the same PIN for  
both your phone and the device. For example, if  
you enter 1234 as the device’s PIN, then enter  
1234 as your phone’s PIN.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Hands  
Free.  
2 Select the device you want to connect to.  
3 If prompted whether you want to bond with the  
device, press A under Yes.  
116  
 
Setting Device Details  
4 If prompted, enter the Bluetooth PIN.  
Setting Device Details  
The device history stores a list of up to 20 devices  
that have connected with your phone.  
Your phone will connect to the device.  
Using Bluetooth® During a Call  
During a call, you can connect with available  
Bluetooth devices.  
To view the device history, from the main menu,  
select Bluetooth > Device History.  
From the device history, you can:  
Note: If the Hands Free menu contains only one  
device, then your phone will automatically  
try to connect to that device.  
Edit device names  
Change device access settings  
Delete devices  
1 While in a call, press m. Select Use Bluetooth.  
2 Select the device you want to connect to.  
Note: If you delete a device from device history,  
you will have to find the device to connect  
with it. See “Discovering Bluetooth®  
Devices” on page 115.  
Disconnecting From a Device  
To disconnect from a device:  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Viewing Device Details  
To view the name and the access setting of a  
device:  
Hands Free.  
2 Press O.  
3 Press A under Drop.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
2 Select the device you want.  
Note: Pressing A under No when prompted  
exits the menu without disconnecting the  
device.  
4 Press A under Yes.  
117  
           
Bluetooth®  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 To delete the device, press O.  
Editing Device Names  
You can edit a device name so the device is easier  
to identify.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Sending Contacts, Datebook  
Events and Pictures  
Bluetooth lets you send Contact entries, Datebook  
events, or pictures you have stored in the Media  
CenterMedia Center to connected devices.  
Device History.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to rename.  
3 Press A under Edit or press O.  
4 Select Name.  
5 Enter the new name.  
Note: A device name can have a maximum of  
Sending Contacts  
1 From the main menu, select Contacts. -or-  
40 characters.  
6 Press O.  
From the idle screen, press A under Contcs.  
Editing Device Access Settings  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
2 Highlight the contact you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Transfer.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to set access for.  
3 Press A under Edit or press O.  
4 Select Access.  
5 Select Bluetooth.  
6 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
5 Select the setting you want.  
7 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Deleting Devices  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the contact.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to delete.  
118  
         
Receiving Items  
Sending Datebook Events  
Sending Pictures  
1 From the main menu, select Datebook.  
2 Highlight the event you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
Note: You can only send pictures if they are not  
forward locked.  
1 From the main menu, select Media Center.  
2 Highlight the picture you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Transfer.  
5 Select Bluetooth.  
4 Select Transfer.  
5 If the event you select repeats, then you will be  
prompted to choose whether to send the  
selected instance of the event or all instances of  
the event.  
6 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
To send only the selected instance of the event,  
select This Event Only. -or-  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
To send all instances of the event, select  
Repeat Events.  
7 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the picture.  
6 Select Bluetooth.  
7 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
Receiving Items  
You receive a prompt when your phone has an  
incoming transfer. You must either accept or reject  
the transfer.  
8 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the event.  
Canceling Transfers  
You can cancel a transfer while the transfer is in  
progress.  
1 Press A under Cancel.  
119  
         
Bluetooth®  
2 Press A under Yes to cancel. -or-  
Press A under No to continue with the transfer.  
Note: If a transfer is interrupted, the  
Connection Failed prompt displays.  
Viewing and Storing Received Items  
After an incoming transfer is complete, your phone  
translates the item. The item appears on your  
phone’s display. You can choose to either store or  
discard the item. Items are stored as follows:  
Contact entries to Contacts, pictures to the Media  
Center and Datebook events to Datebook.  
To store the item, press A under Store or press  
O. -or-  
To discard an item without saving it, press A  
under Discard.  
120  
 
Filtering by Voice Record Type  
Voice Records  
You can set your phone to show all voice records,  
only voice records created when your phone was in  
a call, or only voice records created when your  
phone was not in a call.  
A voice record is a recording you make with your  
phone and can play back. You can record notes to  
yourself when your phone is not in a call or record  
phone calls when your phone is in a call.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Filter.  
Voice records created when your phone is not in a  
call can be accessed through the media center and  
sent in a MMS messages.  
4 Select the option you want:  
Viewing Voice Records  
To view your list of voice records:  
All — show all voice records.  
In Call — show only voice records created  
when your phone was in a call.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to view more voice records.  
Standard — show only voice records created  
when your phone was not in a call.  
Tip: You can also press * or # to scroll through  
these options while viewing the list of voice  
records.  
Voice Record Icons  
One of these icons appears next to each voice  
record:  
Creating Voice Records  
A voice record made while your phone was  
not in a call.  
c
Phone Not in a Call  
To record a note to yourself:  
A voice record made while your phone was in  
a call.  
v
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord >  
[New VoiceRec].  
121  
             
Voice Records  
2 Say the message you want to record into the  
microphone.  
Labeling Voice Records  
When you create a voice record, it is labeled with  
the date it was recorded. You can then rename it  
with a custom label.  
3 When you are finished recording, press O.  
Phone in a Call  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the voice record you want to label.  
3 Press A under Label.  
4 Enter the label you want to assign.  
5 Press O.  
To record a phone call:  
1 While on an active call, press m.  
2 Select Record.  
3 When you are finished recording, press O.  
Note: Recording of phone calls is subject to  
applicable laws regarding privacy and  
recording of phone conversations.  
Locking Voice Records  
When you lock a voice record, it cannot be deleted  
Playing Voice Records  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
until you unlock it.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the voice record you want to lock or  
2 Select the voice record you want to play.  
3 To stop the voice record while it is playing, press  
O.  
unlock.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Lock to lock the message. -or-  
Tip: To pause or resume, press any number  
key.  
Select Unlock to unlock the message.  
When a voice record is locked, this icon R appears  
next to it.  
122  
           
Deleting Voice Records  
2 With [New VoiceRec] highlighted, press A  
under Memory. -or-  
Deleting Voice Records  
Deleting a voice record from the voice record list  
deletes it from all parts of your phone, including the  
media center.  
With any voice record highlighted, press m.  
Select Memory.  
To free memory by deleting all unlocked voice  
records:  
Deleting a Voice Record  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the unlocked voice record you want to  
delete.  
1 From the voice records memory screen, press  
A under Delete.  
2 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Note: Voice records are stored in your phone  
using the same memory space used to  
store messages, Java application data,  
pictures, ring tones, and wallpaper  
images. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for voice records.  
Deleting All Voice Records  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to any voice record.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete All.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for voice  
records:  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
123  
       
Running Applications  
To run an application that has a shortcut on the  
main menu:  
Java Applications  
Java applications on your phone will automatically  
install upon initial power-up or once a new  
application is loaded on your phone.  
1 From the main menu, select the application or  
suite of applications you want to run.  
2 If you have selected a suite of applications,  
select the application you want to run.  
To download more Java applications, go to the  
Downloads menu option on your phone or go to  
www.sprint.com and click on Wireless (under  
“Personal”), Accessories (under “Shop Nextel  
Online”), and Ring Tones & More in the “Nextel  
Personal” menu.  
To run an application that does not have a shortcut  
on the main menu:  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Select the application or suite of applications  
you want to run.  
3 If you have selected a suite of applications,  
select the application you want to run.  
Note: Using Java applications may cause your  
phone to use up more battery power than  
other uses of your phone.  
Installing Applications  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Select the application or suite of applications  
you want to install.  
Tip: If you do not hear the sounds associated  
with the Java application, select Settings >  
Volume and check the volumes of Java  
Speaker and Java Earpiece.  
Installation messages appear as the application  
installs.  
Suspending Applications  
3 If you want to create a shortcut to the Java  
application on the main menu: Press A under  
Next. Press A under Yes. Press O.  
When you suspend an application, it does not stop  
running. It goes to the background so that you can  
run another application in the foreground.  
4 Press A under Done.  
To suspend an application:  
Press e.  
124  
         
Resuming Applications  
To view your suspended applications:  
To end all applications:  
From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to Suspended Apps.  
3 Press m.  
You can have up to 3 applications running at one  
time — 1 running in the foreground and 2 in the  
background.  
4 Select End All.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
6 If you want to end all applications without letting  
them exit, press A under EndNow.  
Resuming Applications  
You can resume a suspended application at any  
time. This brings it to the foreground.  
Downloading Applications  
1 From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps.  
2 Select the application you want to resume.  
If you want to run more Java applications, you can  
download them into your phone.  
Ending Applications  
To end an application:  
Check the Downloads menu option on your phone  
for a catalog of items available for purchase and  
download. You can also go to go to  
www.sprint.com and click on Wireless (under  
“Personal”), Accessories (under “Shop Nextel  
Online”), and Ring Tones & More in the “Nextel  
Personal” menu for a selection of Java applications  
and downloading instructions.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 If the application you want to end is part of a  
suite of applications, select the suite.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to end.  
Press A under End. -or-  
Deleting Applications  
To delete an application:  
If End is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select End.  
Tip: You can also end applications from the  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to the application you want to delete.  
Suspended Apps screen.  
125  
         
Java Applications  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Deinstall.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
6 When your phone has finished deleting the  
application, press A under Done.  
Note: Java applications are stored in your  
phone using the same memory space  
used to store messages, voice records,  
pictures, ring tones, and wallpaper  
images. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for voice records.  
To delete all Java applications:  
Shortcuts on the Main Menu  
When you install an application, you can create a  
shortcut to the application on the main menu.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to Java System.  
3 Press m.  
To create a shortcut to an application that is  
already installed:  
4 Select Delete All.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove  
Apps. -or-  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for Java  
applications:  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps > Java  
System.  
2 Press A under Next.  
3 To see more memory information, press A  
under Next again.  
2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any  
application that has a shortcut on the main menu  
has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to create a  
shortcut for.  
Deleting Java applications frees memory.  
4 Press O.  
5 Press A under Done.  
126  
     
Java Applications and GPS Enabled  
To remove a shortcut:  
Setting Privacy for All Java  
Applications  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove  
Apps. -or-  
These options control the privacy of all Java  
applications on your phone:  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps.  
Restricted — No Java or similar software  
applications may access the location of your  
phone. However, location information may still  
be available to the phone’s owner, fleet  
manager, or account administrator.  
2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any  
application that has a shortcut on the main menu  
has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to remove the  
Unrestricted — All Java applications may  
access the location of your phone, without  
notifying you.  
shortcut for.  
4 Press O.  
5 Press A under Done.  
By Permission — When a Java application  
attempts to access the location of your phone,  
you are prompted to give permission. However,  
location information may still be available to the  
phone’s owner, fleet manager, or account  
administrator.  
Java Applications and GPS  
Enabled  
Some Java applications can make use of your  
phone’s GPS feature to determine the approximate  
geographical location of your phone. (See “GPS  
Enabled” on page 130 for more information on the  
GPS feature.) However, for privacy reasons, you  
may not always want Java applications to access  
the location of your phone. Your phone protects  
your privacy by giving you the option to block all or  
some Java applications from accessing the  
location of your phone.  
See “Setting Privacy Options” on page 136 for  
information on choosing these options.  
127  
 
Java Applications  
Only Once — If the application requests  
access to the location of your phone again,  
you are prompted to grant or deny  
permission.  
Granting or Denying Permission  
If you choose By Permission, you must grant or  
deny each Java application access to the location  
of your phone when the application requests  
access for the first time. You may be required to  
grant or deny subsequent requests from the same  
application, depending on the privacy setting you  
choose for the individual Java application (see  
“Setting Privacy for Each Java Application” on  
page 128).  
To grant this request:  
1 Press A under Grant. The application accesses  
your phone’s location.  
2 Select the granting option you want:  
Always — If the application requests access  
to the location of your phone again, the  
request is granted without notifying you.  
When a Java application requests access to the  
location of your phone, a screen appears informing  
you.  
For this session — If the application  
requests access to the location of your phone  
again before you power off your phone, the  
request is granted without notifying you.  
To deny this request:  
1 Press A under Deny. The application does not  
access the location of your phone.  
2 Select the denying option you want:  
Only Once — If the application requests  
access to the location of your phone again,  
you are prompted to grant or deny  
permission.  
Always — If the application requests access  
to the location of your phone again, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
Setting Privacy for Each Java  
Application  
After a given Java application requests access to  
the location of your phone for the first time, you  
have the opportunity to set the GPS privacy option  
for that Java application.  
For this session — If the application  
requests access to the location of your phone  
again before you power off your phone, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
128  
   
Java Applications and GPS Enabled  
2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications  
you want to set the privacy option for.  
If the application has requested access to the  
location of your phone, this icon S appears  
when you highlight the application.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Permissions.  
5 Select the privacy option you want for this  
application:  
Always — The application always has  
permission to access the location of your  
phone, without notifying you.  
Ask — When the application requests access  
to the location of your phone, you are  
prompted to grant or deny permission (see  
“Granting or Denying Permission” on page  
128).  
Never — When the application requests  
access to the location of your phone, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
129  
Java applications loaded on your phone can also  
request your location. If your phone is connected to  
a laptop computer or similar device, software  
running on that device can request your location.  
To protect your privacy, you can control whether  
these requests are granted.  
GPS Enabled  
Your phone’s GPS Enabled feature uses  
information from Global Positioning System (GPS)  
satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the  
approximate geographical location of your phone,  
expressed as latitude and longitude. The  
availability and accuracy of this location  
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep  
in Mind  
If you are using the GPS feature of your phone  
while driving, please give full attention to driving  
and to the road.  
information (and the amount of time that it takes to  
calculate it) will vary depending on the environment  
in which you are using the GPS feature. For  
example, GPS location fixes are often difficult to  
obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high  
buildings, or in other situations where you have not  
established a clear broad view of the sky. Also,  
nearby radio and electronic equipment may block  
or interfere with reception from these distant  
satellites. SEE: “IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in  
Mind”.  
Where adequate signals from multiple satellites  
are not available (usually because your GPS  
antenna cannot establish a view of a wide area of  
open sky), the GPS feature of your phone WILL  
NOT WORK. Such situations include but are  
not limited to:  
When you make a 911 emergency call, the GPS  
feature of your phone can help emergency  
personnel locate you if your phone has adequate  
access to GPS satellite signals and your  
emergency response center is equipped to process  
such information.  
In underground locations.  
Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered  
vehicles.  
Under any other metal or concrete roof or  
structure.  
You can also use the GPS feature to view your  
approximate location. Location information  
appears on the phone’s display.  
Between tall buildings or under dense  
tree-cover.  
Near a powerful radio or television tower.  
130  
         
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind  
Some radios, entertainment equipment, and  
other electronic devices may generate  
signals that can block or interfere with the  
GPS receiver ability to receive the distant  
satellite signals, particularly when such  
devices are operating in close proximity to  
the GPS receiver. Therefore, in a 911 call, or  
when otherwise using the GPS location  
function, always move your phone away  
from any such devices.  
Even where adequate signals from multiple  
satellites are available, your GPS feature will  
only provide an approximate location, often  
within 150 feet (45 meters) but sometimes  
much further from your actual location. Advice  
on how to improve GPS performance is  
provided in “Enhancing GPS Performance” on  
page 134.  
While the GPS feature of your phone can be a  
valuable navigational aid, it does not replace the  
need for careful navigating and good judgment.  
Never rely solely on one device for navigation.  
Remember that the accuracy of the location  
information and the time needed to obtain it will  
vary depending on circumstances, particularly the  
ability to receive signals from adequate numbers of  
satellites.  
When your GPS antenna is covered (for  
example, by your hand or other object) or  
facing the ground.  
In temperature extremes outside the  
operating limits of your phone.  
Walking or driving very slowly may also  
substantially reduce GPS performance.  
On emergency calls, your phone uses assistance  
information from the phone network to improve the  
speed and accuracy of your phone’s location  
calculation: if such assistance information  
becomes unavailable, it may reduce the speed and  
accuracy of the location calculation.  
Even where location information can be  
calculated in such situations, it may take much  
longer to do so, and your location estimate may  
not be as accurate. Therefore, in any 911 call,  
always report the location to the emergency  
response center if you can and if you cannot,  
remain on your phone for as long as the  
emergency response center instructs you.  
131  
GPS Enabled  
The satellites used by the GPS feature of your  
phone are controlled by the U.S. government and  
are subject to changes implemented in accordance  
with the Department of Defense GPS user policy  
and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. These  
changes may affect the performance of the GPS  
feature of your phone.  
In some cases, your local 911 emergency  
response center may not be equipped to  
receive GPS location information. For this  
reason, and because the GPS location information  
reported is only approximate or may not be  
available in your location (see “IMPORTANT:  
Things to Keep in Mind” on page 130), always  
report your location to the 911 operator you  
speak to when making an emergency call, if able,  
just as you would when using a phone without GPS  
capabilities.  
Making an Emergency Call  
Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency  
response center. If you are on an active call, you  
must end it before calling 911.  
Note: If you are concerned about whether your  
local 911 emergency response center is  
equipped to receive GPS location  
When you make an emergency 911 call, the GPS  
feature of your phone begins to seek information to  
calculate your approximate location. It will take  
the GPS feature of your phone some time to  
determine your approximate location. Even  
where your phone has good access to sufficient  
GPS satellite signals and network assist data, it  
may take 30 seconds or more to determine the  
approximate location. This time will increase where  
there is reduced access to satellite signals. When  
your approximate location is determined, it is made  
available to the appropriate emergency response  
center.  
information, contact your local authorities.  
In general, if your phone has access to signals  
from more GPS satellites, your location will be  
determined faster and more accurately than if your  
phone has access to signals from fewer GPS  
satellites.  
If your phone does not have adequate access to  
GPS satellites signals, the location of the nearest  
cell tower in contact with your phone is  
automatically made available to the emergency  
response center, if the center has the capability to  
receive such information.  
132  
     
Viewing Your Approximate Location  
See “Enhancing GPS Performance” on page  
134 for information on how to help your phone  
determine your location.  
It may take your phone several minutes to  
complete the process of determining your location.  
During this time, a message usually appears on  
your phone’s display saying your phone is  
scanning for satellites. For tips on getting the best  
location calculation, see “Enhancing GPS  
Performance”.  
Viewing Your Approximate  
Location  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Position.  
2 Scroll to view the entire screen.  
The Position screen displays the updated  
information.  
To cancel a location calculation before it is  
completed:  
This displays the following information about the  
last time your location was calculated:  
Press A under Cancel to return to the Position  
The time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date  
that the location was last calculated  
screen. -or-  
The approximate location, expressed as latitude  
and longitude  
Press e to return to the idle screen.  
Each time approximate location of your phone is  
calculated, the latest location information is stored  
in your phone and remains there even when your  
phone is powered off. You will see this information  
the next time you view the Position screen.  
The estimated accuracy of the calculated  
location. This estimate of accuracy is only a very  
rough estimate and may vary substantially from  
the actual accuracy of the approximate location  
information reported.  
If you received a phone call or alert while  
attempting to determine your location, the Position  
screen will disappear, but your phone will continue  
attempting to determine its location. If it is  
successful, the new location information will be  
displayed the next time you view the Position  
screen.  
The number of satellites used to calculate the  
location. In general, more satellites make for  
better accuracy.  
To calculate your location again:  
Press A under Refresh.  
133  
   
GPS Enabled  
Hold your phone to enhance reception. Signals  
from GPS satellites are transmitted to your GPS  
antenna, which is in your phone antenna. Hold  
your phone away from your body, giving the  
antenna clear access to satellite signals. Do not  
cover the antenna area with your fingers or  
anything else.  
Enhancing GPS Performance  
Sometimes the GPS feature of your phone may be  
unable to complete a location calculation  
successfully. If this happens when you are making  
an emergency call, the location of the nearest cell  
tower in contact with your phone is made available  
to the appropriate emergency response center if  
the center has the capability to receive such  
information. If this happens when you are trying to  
view your location on the phone’s display, you will  
see a message indicating that your phone cannot  
access satellites.  
GPS antenna  
(in back)  
To improve accuracy and increase your chances of  
a successful calculation, do the following while  
your phone is determining your approximate  
location:  
Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best  
where there is nothing between your phone and  
a large amount of open sky. If possible, go  
outside, away from tall buildings and foliage.  
While performance in a building is improved by  
moving closer to windows, glass with certain sun  
shielding films may block satellite signals.  
Move away from electronic devices. Radios,  
entertainment devices, and other electronic  
devices may generate interfering signals that  
may prevent GPS receiver operation if they are  
in close proximity to the phone. Move your  
phone away from such devices when using the  
GPS-Enabled feature.  
Extend your phone antenna.  
134  
   
Updating Satellite Almanac Data  
Stand still. If possible, stand still until your phone  
is finished determining your location. Moving  
your phone at a walking pace while your phone  
is calculating your approximate location may  
substantially decrease GPS performance.  
Updating Satellite Almanac  
Data  
Note: This feature may not be offered by Sprint.  
Another way to keep the GPS feature of your  
phone working well is to keep your satellite  
almanac data up to date.  
In a car. When using the GPS Enabled feature in  
a car, position your phone so that the GPS  
antenna has good access to GPS signals  
through the car’s windows. Typically, the GPS  
antenna has best access to GPS signals in a car  
when placed near a window.  
Note: Although moving your phone at a walking  
pace decreases GPS performance,  
moving it at the speed of a moving car  
does not.  
The United States government maintains an  
almanac of data about where GPS satellites are as  
they orbit the Earth. This information is available to  
your phone. Keeping your satellite almanac up to  
date helps your phone determine your location  
more quickly.  
The almanac contains information about the  
location of satellites, their operational status, and  
other satellite information. Keeping this information  
updated enhances the performance of your GPS  
feature. In most cases, your phone will be able to  
get a fix in strong satellite signal conditions with  
outdated almanac data, but it may take longer.  
Stay in network coverage. Depending on your  
service provider, the network will provide your  
phone with information that helps determine  
your location more quickly and accurately.  
Note: When you make an emergency call, your  
phone does not rely upon the almanac to  
determine your location.  
135  
   
GPS Enabled  
If your satellite almanac data is out of date, your  
phone may prompt you to update it. Follow the  
instructions that appear on the phone’s display.  
You may be asked to go to a Web site or call a  
customer care number.  
Unrestricted — All applications may view the  
location of your phone, without notifying you.  
By Permission — When an application  
attempts to view the location of your phone,  
you will be prompted to give permission.  
However, location information may still be  
available to the phone’s owner, fleet  
manager, or account administrator.  
Setting Privacy Options  
Your phone’s GPS privacy options control whether  
Java applications on your phone or other software  
applications may view the location of your  
phone.You may set your phone to one of these  
GPS privacy options.  
Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature  
To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being  
altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy  
option can be protected by a PIN.  
Note: Privacy options do not apply to the  
transmission of location information  
during emergency 911 calls.  
When you receive your phone, the GPS security  
feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a  
GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If  
you turn this feature on, you will be required to  
enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy  
options.  
To set your GPS privacy options:  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Privacy.  
2 If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled,  
enter your GPS PIN. (See “Setting the GPS PIN  
Security Feature” for more information.)  
To turn the GPS Enabled security feature on or off:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > GPS PIN.  
2 Select On or Off.  
3 Enter the current GPS PIN.  
3 Select the privacy option you want:  
Restricted — No Java or similar software  
applications may view the location of your  
phone. However, location information may still  
be available to the phone’s owner, fleet  
manager, or account administrator.  
Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS  
PIN is 0000.  
4 Press A under Ok.  
136  
           
Using GPS With Map Software  
To change your GPS PIN:  
displays your location on a map. Your phone  
provides an updated location every second and the  
map software displays your changing location on  
its map.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Change Passwords > GPS PIN.  
2 Enter the current GPS PIN.  
See “Enhancing GPS Performance” on page  
134 for more details on obtaining good location  
information.  
Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS  
PIN is 0000.  
3 Press A under Ok.  
4 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN.  
5 Press A under Ok.  
6 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN to confirm.  
7 Press A under Ok.  
Note: Because your phone is continuously  
determining your location, using the GPS  
feature of your phone with map software  
uses the phone’s battery power quickly.  
Software Compatibility  
Your phone sends location information to your  
laptop or other device using the standard National  
Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format.  
Your phone supports output messages in  
NMEA-0183 format and supports the following  
NMEA-0183 sentences: GGA, GLL, GSA, GSV,  
RMC, and VTG.  
Using GPS With Map Software  
You can use the GPS feature of your phone to  
provide approximate location data to a laptop  
computer or similar device that is running  
interactive map software such as that made by  
DeLorme or Microsoft. This way, if your phone has  
good access to GPS signals, your approximate  
position on a map can be made available as you  
travel in a vehicle.  
The map software running on your laptop or other  
device must support NMEA 3.0.  
To do this, connect your phone to your laptop (or  
other device) with a data cable, and set your phone  
to transmit data (see “Getting Started”). Your  
phone then provides your approximate location to  
the device running the map software, which  
137  
   
GPS Enabled  
3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of your  
Getting Started  
To connect your phone to your laptop or other  
device:  
laptop or other device.  
Make sure no other application is using the COM  
port selected.  
1 Open the connector cover.  
Make sure the COM port settings of your laptop or  
other device are set to the following:  
Bits per second: 4800  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
connector  
cover  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: Hardware  
To set your phone to send location information to  
your laptop or other device:  
2 With the phone’s display facing up, insert the  
serial data cable’s connector into the accessory  
connector, until you hear a click.  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Interface.  
2 Set NMEA OUT to On.  
Your phone is now sending location data to your  
laptop or other device.  
To stop your phone from sending location data to  
your laptop or other device:  
Set NMEA OUT to Off.  
Each time you power your phone on, NMEA OUT  
is automatically set to Off.  
138  
 
A date — The date automatically assigned to an  
event is the date that was highlighted or  
selected when you began creating the event.  
You can change this date before storing the  
event.  
Datebook  
Datebook stores up to 250 events. You can store  
events over a 13 month period — 12 months after  
and 1 month before the current date.  
A repeat — lets you store the event as a  
recurring event.  
A Datebook event contains:  
A subject — A name you assign to the event.  
You can also enter a phone number,  
Walkie-Talkie number, or Talkgroup number  
here. After the event is stored, you can call this  
number from Datebook or when you get a  
reminder of this event.  
A reminder — If an event has a start time, you  
can set Datebook to remind you that the event is  
going to start.  
A ring tone for the reminder  
A profile that your phone is switched to while the  
event is occurring  
A location — The location of the event. You can  
also enter a phone number, Walkie-Talkie  
number, or Talkgroup number here. After the  
event is stored, you can call this number from  
Datebook or when you get a reminder of this  
event.  
A Java application that starts when the event  
starts  
Only the subject and date are required.  
Viewing Datebook  
To access Datebook:  
A start time — The start time automatically  
assigned to an event is the beginning of the day.  
You can change the start time, or assign no start  
time, before storing the event.  
From the main menu, select Datebook.  
You can view Datebook by the day, by the week, or  
by the month. You can also view the details of any  
event.  
A duration — The length of time the event lasts.  
In day view, brief information about each event for  
that day appears.  
139  
         
Datebook  
In week view, events appear as markers  
corresponding to their times.  
2 Select Go To Today.  
To go to any date in Datebook:  
In month view, days with events appear with a  
marker in the corner.  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
2 Select Go To Date.  
3 Select the date you want.  
To view an event:  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
Creating Events  
Every Datebook event must have a subject and be  
stored to a date. Other information is optional.  
2 Select the event.  
To change the current view:  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
2 Select the view you want.  
You may enter the information in any order by  
scrolling through the event details.  
Note: Day view is the default setting.  
After you have entered the information you want,  
you can press A under Done to store the event to  
Datebook.  
Navigating Datebook  
To scroll through Datebook:  
If you decide you do not want to store the event:  
Press A under Cancel.  
Scroll left and right using the navigation key. -or-  
In week view and month view, press * or #.  
To see more in day view:  
To create a Datebook event:  
1 While viewing Datebook, press A under New.  
-or-  
Scroll up and down using the navigation key.  
To highlight a day in month view:  
Enter the date using the keypad.  
To go to today’s date:  
In day view, select [New Event].  
2 To assign a subject to the event:  
Select Subject.  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
Enter the name. -or-  
140  
   
Creating Events  
Press A under Browse to choose from common  
6 The date automatically assigned to an event is  
the date that was highlighted or selected when  
you began creating the event. To change the  
date of the event:  
event names. -or-  
Enter a phone number, Walkie-Talkie number,  
or Talkgroup number. After the event is stored,  
you can call this number.  
Select Date.  
When you are finished, press O.  
3 If you want to assign a location to the event:  
Select Location.  
Enter the date you want.  
7 If you want to make the event a recurring event:  
Select Repeat.  
Enter the location. -or-  
Select the repeat cycle you want.  
Enter a phone number, Walkie-Talkie number,  
or Talkgroup number. After the event is stored,  
you can call this number.  
If the event occurs more than once a week:  
Select Multiple Day. Select the days you want.  
Press A under Done.  
When you are finished, press O.  
Select the date you want this event to stop  
recurring.  
4 The start time automatically assigned to an  
event is the beginning of the day. If you want to  
change the start time or assign no start time:  
8 If you want to create a reminder for this event:  
Select Reminder.  
Select Start.  
Select the reminder time you want. -or-  
Select Custom to enter a reminder time.  
Enter the start time you want. -or-  
Press A under No Time to assign no start time.  
5 If you want to assign a duration to the event:  
Select Duration.  
Note: If an event has no start time, you cannot  
create a reminder for it.  
9 If you have entered all the information you want  
for this event, press A under Done. -or-  
Select the duration you want. -or-  
Select Custom to enter a duration.  
141  
Datebook  
If you want to assign a ring tone, a profile, or a  
Java application to the event, see “Assigning  
More Options”.  
If you created a reminder for this event, your  
phone prompts you to start the Java application  
when you get the reminder.  
Assigning More Options  
To assign more options before storing an event:  
Editing Events  
To change the details of an event:  
1 If you have created a reminder for the event and  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
3 Press A under Edit.  
want to set the ring tone for that reminder:  
Select Ring Tone.  
Select the ring tone you want from the ring tones  
stored in your phone.  
Tip: To copy an event to another date: Press m.  
Select Copy.  
2 If you want to assign a profile that your phone is  
switched to while the event is occurring:  
4 Follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Events” on page 140 to edit the various fields.  
Select Profile.  
Deleting Events  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
3 Press m.  
Select the profile you want from the profiles  
stored in your phone.  
Your phone switches to this profile when the  
event starts and switches back to the previous  
profile when the event ends.  
4 Select Delete.  
3 If you want to assign a Java application to start  
when the event starts:  
5 If the event is not a recurring event, press O or  
press A under Yes to confirm. -or-  
Select App.  
If the event is a recurring event:  
Select the application you want from the Java  
applications stored in your phone.  
Select This Event Only to delete only the event  
selected in step 2. -or-  
142  
               
Receiving Reminders  
Select Repeat Event to delete all occurrences  
Making Calls From Datebook  
and Datebook Reminders  
If you stored a phone number, Walkie-Talkie  
number, or Talkgroup number in the Subject or  
Location field of a Datebook event, you can call or  
send a call alert to that number from Datebook or  
from the reminder of that event.  
of the event.  
Receiving Reminders  
If you created a reminder for a Datebook event,  
when the reminder time occurs, your phone notifies  
you with text on the display and a reminder tone.  
To view more details about the event:  
Press A under View.  
If you store numbers in both the Subject and  
Location fields, you can call or send a call alert to  
the number stored in Subject and the number  
stored in Location as long as the number stored in  
Subject is a Walkie-Talkie or Talkgroup number  
and the number stored in Location is a phone  
number.  
To dismiss the reminder:  
Press O. -or-  
Press A under Dismiss.  
For Events With Java Applications  
If you assigned a Java application to start when the  
event starts, you can start the application when you  
get the reminder.  
If both are the same type of number, the number in  
Subject is called or sent a call alert. To call or send  
a call alert to the number stored in Location, you  
must delete the number stored in Subject.  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Launch.  
Making Calls From Datebook  
To make a phone call:  
1 Highlight or select the event containing the  
number you want to call or send a call alert to.  
2 Press s. -or-  
Press m. Select Call # in Event.  
143  
       
Datebook  
To make a Walkie-Talkie call or Talkgroup call:  
Customizing Datebook Setup  
To access Datebook setup options:  
1 Highlight or select the event containing the  
number you want to call or send a call alert to.  
1 From the main menu, select Datebook.  
2 Press m.  
2 Press and hold the Walkie-Talkie button on the  
side of your phone. -or-  
3 Select Setup.  
If you did not include a # before the Talkgroup  
you want to call: Press m. Select Talkgroup.  
You can view or change these options:  
To send a call alert:  
Start View — sets Datebook to start in day view,  
week view, or month view when you access  
Datebook.  
1 Highlight or select the event containing the  
number you want to call or send a call alert to.  
2 Press m. Select Alert # in Event.  
Daily Begin — sets the beginning of your day.  
This is the earliest time of day displayed in week  
view, if you have a 12-hour day view.  
Making Calls From Datebook  
Reminders  
To call a number:  
Delete After — sets the amount of time  
Datebook waits to delete an event after it  
occurs.  
Press s. -or-  
Time Shift — lets you shift the times of all  
Datebook events. This is useful if you are  
traveling to a different time zone.  
Press m. Select Call # in Event.  
To make Walkie-Talkie calls or Talkgroup calls:  
Press the Walkie-Talkie button.  
To send a call alert:  
Note: This feature may not be offered by Nextel.  
Alert Timeout — sets the amount of time a tone  
continues to sound when you receive a  
message notification, call alert, or Datebook  
reminder.  
Press m. Select Alert # in Event.  
144  
   
Customizing Datebook Setup  
Clock — controls whether the time and date  
appear on the idle screen; sets time and date  
format; sets year.  
145  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound when you receive Walkie-Talkie calls, Group  
Walkie-Talkie calls, and Talkgroup calls, even if  
you want your phone to ring for other features:  
Customizing Your Phone  
Setting the Volume  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > DC/GC  
Options > Alert Type.  
Of the Earpiece and Speaker  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume.  
2 Scroll to Earpiece to set the earpiece volume.  
-or-  
Tip: If Alert Type does not appear: From the  
main menu, select Ring Tones. Make sure  
VibeAll is set to Off. Repeat step 1.  
Scroll to Speaker to set the speaker volume.  
3 To set the volume:  
2 Select Vibrate to set your phone to vibrate.  
Tip: Select Silent in step 2 to set your phone to  
neither vibrate nor make a sound.  
Scroll left or right. -or-  
Press the volume controls.  
Of the Ringer  
Changing the Look of Your  
Phone  
Press the volume controls.  
Themes  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate  
A theme lets you control the look of the display by  
changing the color scheme, wallpaper, the look of  
the main menu, and the look of the display options.  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound when you receive phone calls, Walkie-Talkie  
calls, Group Walkie-Talkie calls, Talkgroup calls,  
call alerts, message notifications, and Datebook  
reminders, see “Setting Your Phone to Vibrate” on  
page 63.  
To change the theme of your phone:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Theme.  
2 Select the theme you want.  
146  
                       
Changing the Look of Your Phone  
Including Pictures From the Media Center  
Wallpaper  
If you have set wallpapers to change automatically,  
you can include pictures stored in the media center  
as images that may appear on the idle screen.  
A wallpaper is an image that appears on the idle  
screen.  
If you want more wallpapers, you can download  
them into your phone for a fee. Check the  
Downloads menu option on your phone for a  
catalog of items available for purchase and  
download.  
Note: Pictures sent to you in MMS messages or  
with Direct Send cannot be set as  
wallpaper.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Wallpaper > Select Pictures.  
2 Select the pictures you want. -or-  
Note: Some themes may prevent you from  
changing your wallpaper.  
Choosing a Wallpaper  
Select All to include all pictures in the media  
center.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Wallpaper > Wallpaper.  
3 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
2 Select the wallpaper you want.  
Setting Text Size  
To set the size of the text on the display:  
Tip: If you want to see what the wallpaper looks  
like, press A under View.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Setting Wallpaper to Change Automatically  
Display/Info > Text Size.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Wallpaper > Auto Cycle.  
2 Select how often you want the wallpaper to  
change.  
2 Select the option you want:  
Zoom — 11 characters per line  
Standard — 14 characters per line  
Compressed — 18 characters per line  
Any of the wallpapers in your phone may appear  
on the idle screen.  
147  
 
Customizing Your Phone  
To set your phone to briefly display very large  
digits when you enter numbers at the idle screen:  
Setting the Backlight  
A backlight lights the display and keypad when you  
make or receive a call, or press keys or buttons.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Large Dialing.  
2 Set this option to Large Digits.  
You can control how many seconds the backlight  
stays on. The available intervals are: 5 seconds, 10  
seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or  
90 seconds.  
Setting Contrast  
To set the contrast of the display:  
When the backlight is off, pressing a key on the  
keypad turns the backlight on but does not perform  
the action associated with the key.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Contrast.  
2 Scroll left or right to set the contrast.  
Note: When your phone enters Sleep mode, the  
backlight turns off.  
Setting the Menu View  
You can set the items on your main menu and Java  
applications menu to appear as large icons or a  
list:  
To turn the backlight off:  
From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Off.  
To control how long the backlight stays on:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Menu View. -or-  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Timer.  
2 Select the number of seconds you want the  
backlight to stay on.  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Menu View.  
2 To choose a list, select List View. -or-  
To control how long the backlight stays on while a  
Java application is displayed:  
To choose large icons, select Icon View.  
1 Select Settings > Display/Info > Backlight >  
Java Timer.  
148  
       
Temporarily Turning Off Transmissions  
2 Select the number of seconds you want the  
To set your phone so that it cannot make or receive  
phone calls, Walkie-Talkie calls, Group  
Walkie-Talkie calls, or Talkgroup calls; or transfer  
data:  
backlight to stay on.  
To set the keypad backlight to light up only in low  
light conditions:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Airplane Mode.  
2 Set this option to On.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Sensor.  
2 Set this option to On.  
Note: While powering on your phone, you can  
turn on Airplane mode by pressing p for  
more than 5 seconds.  
Setting Sleep Mode  
Sleep mode turns off your phone’s display if your  
phone remains idle for a specified interval. Sleep  
mode conserves battery power.  
This icon Uappears.  
To restore your phone’s ability to do all these  
things:  
You can set your phone to enter Sleep mode after  
1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 15 minutes of  
inactivity.  
Set this option to Off.  
Note: When Transmitters is set to On, your  
phone’s Bluetooth capability is disabled,  
and all active Bluetooth connections are  
dropped.  
To set the interval for Sleep mode:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Sleep Mode.  
2 Select the interval you want.  
Using Settings  
Settings contains many submenus that let you  
customize your phone.  
Temporarily Turning Off  
Transmissions  
Sometimes you may want to have your phone on,  
but turn off its ability to make and receive calls,  
such as when you are on an airplane.  
For information on applying groups of settings to  
your phone together, see “Profiles” on page 154.  
149  
             
Customizing Your Phone  
Language — sets the language that your phone  
Display/Info Features  
The Display/Info menu controls how the keypad  
and display appear:  
displays.  
Phone Calls Features  
Wallpaper — controls the wallpaper that  
appears on the idle screen.  
The Phone Calls menu controls how your phone  
handles phone calls:  
Text Size — sets the size of text on the display.  
Theme — changes the look of the display.  
Set Line — sets phone line 1 or phone line 2 as  
the active line for outgoing calls.  
Home Icons — controls whether main menu  
icons appear on the idle screen.  
Sleep Mode — controls the interval that elapses  
before your phone enters Sleep mode.  
Any Key Ans — If this feature is on, you can  
answer calls by pressing any key on the keypad.  
Auto Redial — sets your phone to automatically  
redial calls you make when the system is busy.  
Backlight — controls backlight illumination.  
Call Waiting — See “Call Waiting” on page 53.  
Clock — controls whether the time and date  
appear on the idle screen; sets time and date  
format; sets year.  
Auto Ans — sets your phone to automatically  
answer an incoming call after a specified  
number of rings. When this feature is on, the  
phone answers by connecting you to the caller;  
it does not send the call to voicemail, unless you  
are out of coverage or on the line.  
Menu View — controls whether the items on  
your main menu and Java applications menu  
appear as large icons or a list.  
Large Dialing — sets large digits to appear on  
the idle screen when you enter a number.  
Minute Beep — causes a beep to sound every  
minute of an active call.  
Call Duration — causes the duration of a call to  
appear on the display when the call ends.  
Contrast — sets the contrast of the display.  
Status Light — controls the LED status light  
located in the top left corner on the front of your  
phone. See page 2.  
TTY — See “Making TTY Calls” on page 58.  
Notifications — See “Message Notifications” on  
page 67.  
150  
                     
Using Settings  
Menu Options Reorder Menu lets you  
change the order of the items on the main menu  
by grabbing and moving them; Add/Remove  
Apps lets you create a shortcut to a Java  
application on the main menu.  
Java App Control — If you have installed a  
Java application that answers phone calls, this  
setting lets you turn that application on.  
DTMF Dialing — sets whether you can hear  
keypad presses during a call.  
Up Key — sets the main menu item you access  
when you scroll up from the idle screen.  
DC/GC Options Features  
The DC/GC Options menu controls how your  
phone handles Walkie-Talkie calls, Group  
Walkie-Talkie calls, and Talkgroup calls:  
Down Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you scroll down from the idle  
screen.  
Left Key — sets the main menu item you  
Tkgrp Silent — controls whether you hear  
access when you scroll left from the idle screen.  
Talkgroup calls to your Talkgroup.  
Right Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you scroll right from the idle  
screen.  
Tkgrp Area — lets you define your Talkgroup  
area.  
One Touch DC — See “One Touch  
Walkie-Talkie” on page 55.  
Alert Type — controls how your phone notifies  
you when you receive Walkie-Talkie calls,  
Group Walkie-Talkie calls, and Talkgroup calls.  
Center Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press O from the idle screen.  
Left Softkey — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press the left option key from  
the idle screen.  
Personalize Features  
The Personalize menu makes main menu items  
easier to access.  
Right Softkey — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press the right option key from  
the idle screen.  
Power Up — sets the main menu item you see  
when you power on your phone. To set the idle  
screen to be the first thing you see when you  
power on your phone, select Default Ready.  
151  
       
Customizing Your Phone  
Phone Lock —turns on a feature that locks your  
phone: Lock Now takes effect immediately;  
Auto Lock takes effect when your phone is  
powered off and then on. An unlock code is  
required to enable this feature, to unlock the  
phone, and to set a new unlock code. Contact  
Nextel Customer Service for your default unlock  
code.  
Volume Features  
The Volume menu sets the volume of sounds your  
phone makes:  
Line 1 — sets ringer volume for phone line 1.  
Line 2 — sets ringer volume for phone line 2.  
Messages — sets the volume of message  
notifications and Datebook reminders.  
Keypad Lock — locks the phone’s keypad,  
either immediately or automatically after a set  
period of inactivity.  
SIM PIN — enables and disables your phone’s  
SIM PIN security feature. See “Turning the PIN  
Requirement On and Off” on page 13.  
Earpiece — sets the volume of sound coming  
out of the earpiece.  
Speaker — sets the volume of sound coming  
out of the speaker.  
Keypad — sets the volume of sound associated  
with pressing keys and buttons.  
GPS PIN — enables and disables your phone’s  
GPS PIN security feature. See “Setting the GPS  
PIN Security Feature” on page 136.  
Change Passwords — changes your phone  
unlock code, security code, SIM PIN, and GPS  
PIN.  
Java Earpiece — sets the volume of sound  
associated with Java applications coming out of  
the earpiece.  
Java Speaker —sets the volume of sound  
associated with Java applications coming out of  
the speakers.  
Advanced Features  
The Advanced menu contains advanced and rarely  
used Settings features.  
Data — sets the volume of sounds that notify  
you that you are receiving a circuit data call.  
Security Features  
The Security menu lets you turn security features  
on and off and change passwords:  
Alert Timeout — sets the amount of time a tone  
continues to sound when you receive a  
message notification, call alert, or Datebook  
reminder.  
152  
               
Using Settings  
Headset/Spkr — sets the headset option. See  
“Using a Headset” on page 161.  
Connectivity Network ID sets the phone’s  
network IDs and their roaming options under the  
direction of Nextel Customer Service; Master  
Reset lets Nextel Customer Service reset your  
service in the event of a security or provisioning  
problem.  
Reset Defaults Reset Settings returns all  
settings to their original defaults; Reset All  
returns all settings to their original defaults and  
erases all stored lists. Use only under the  
direction of Nextel Customer Service.  
Return to Home — controls how long the recent  
calls list displays after calls.  
Airplane Mode — prevents your phone from  
making or receiving phone calls, Walkie-Talkie  
calls, or Group Walkie-Talkie calls; or  
transferring data.  
Baud Rate — sets the baud rate at which your  
phone communicates with a laptop computer,  
PC, or similar device.  
153  
     
Viewing Profiles  
To view the profiles stored in your phone:  
Profiles  
A profile is a group of settings saved together so  
that you can apply them to your phone easily.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to view.  
A profile contains these settings:  
Tip: The profile that is currently in effect on your  
Ring Tones — sets all options described in  
“Ring Tones” on page 63, except assigning ring  
tones to Contacts.  
phone has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Press A under View.  
4 Scroll to view settings.  
Display/Info — sets Wallpaper, Text Size,  
Theme and Backlight options. See  
“Display/Info Features” on page 150.  
Switching Profiles  
To apply a profile to your phone:  
Phone Calls — sets Set Line and Auto  
Answer options. See “Phone Calls Features” on  
page 150.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to apply.  
3 Press O.  
Volume — sets all options described in “Volume  
Features” on page 152.  
Call Filter — controls which calls, call alerts,  
and message notifications your phone responds  
to. See “Setting Call Filtering” on page 157.  
Advanced — sets headset option. See “Using a  
Headset” on page 161.  
The profile you selected is now in effect.  
How Changing Settings  
Affects Profiles  
Many of the settings contained in profiles can be  
set without switching or editing profiles — for  
example, by selecting Settings or Ring Tones to  
set options, or by setting the volume of the phone’s  
ring using the volume controls.  
Your phone arrives with pre-set profiles. You can  
also create your own profiles.  
154  
               
Temporary Profiles  
When you do this, your phone either:  
A temporary profile stays in effect until you switch  
profiles, power off your phone, or delete it (or the  
profile it is based on) from the list of profiles.  
Updates the profile in effect to reflect these  
changes, without notifying you -or-  
If you do not store a temporary profile, it is deleted  
when you switch profiles or power off your phone.  
Creates a temporary profile that contains these  
changes  
A temporary profile is automatically given the same  
name as the profile it is based on, but with an  
asterisk (*) in front of it.  
To set your phone to create a temporary profile  
that contains changes you make to settings:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup > Temp Profile.  
4 Set this option to On.  
When you view a temporary profile’s settings, the  
options that differ from the profile it is based on  
have an asterisk in front of them.  
Storing a Temporary Profile  
To store a temporary profile as a new profile:  
To set your phone to update the profile in effect to  
reflect any changes you make to settings:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the temporary profile.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Store As New.  
5 Enter the name you want to give the profile.  
When you are finished, press O.  
Set Temp Profile to Off in step 4.  
Temporary Profiles  
If your phone is set to create temporary profiles, a  
temporary profile is created when you make  
changes to settings without switching or editing  
profiles.  
To overwrite the profile the temporary profile is  
based on:  
A temporary profile is based on the profile in effect  
when you made the changes, but reflects the  
changed settings. Making more changes further  
updates the temporary profile, for as long as it is in  
effect.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the temporary profile.  
3 Press m.  
155  
   
Profiles  
4 Select Store Changes.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Edit.  
5 Scroll through the list of options and set their  
values.  
The temporary profile is stored with the name of  
the profile it is based on. The profile it is based on,  
as it existed before you made changes to settings,  
is gone.  
6 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Creating Profiles  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
Deleting Profiles  
To delete a profile:  
2 Select [New Profile]. -or-  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
Scroll to any profile. Press m. Select New.  
3 Enter the name you want to give the profile.  
When you are finished, press O.  
2 Select the profile you want to delete.  
Note: A temporary profile is automatically  
deleted when the profile it is based on is  
deleted.  
4 If you want to base this profile on an existing  
profile: Select Copy from. Select the profile you  
want to base this profile on. If you do not choose  
a profile to copy from, the new profile is based  
on a default profile.  
5 Press A under Create.  
6 Scroll through the list of options and set their  
values.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
To delete all profiles:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
7 Press A under Done.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Editing Profiles  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to edit.  
156  
           
Setting Call Filtering  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all  
Setting Call Filtering  
The call filtering setting in each profile lets you  
control which calls, call alerts, and message  
notifications your phone notifies you of, and which  
it ignores.  
Walkie-Talkie calls and Talkgroup calls.  
On sets your phone to ignore all  
Walkie-Talkie calls and Talkgroup calls.  
5 To set filtering options for Group Walkie-Talkie  
calls, select Group.  
To set call filtering:  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all Group  
Walkie-Talkie calls.  
On sets your phone to ignore all Group  
Walkie-Talkie calls.  
1 While setting options for a profile, select Call  
Filter.  
2 To set filtering options for phone calls, select  
Phone.  
6 To set filtering options for call alerts, select  
Alerts.  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all phone  
calls.  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all call  
alerts.  
On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts.  
All sets your phone to ignore all phone calls.  
All Contacts sets your phone to notify you  
only of phone calls from numbers stored in  
Contacts.  
7 To set filtering options for message notifications,  
select Notifications.  
Some Contacts sets your phone to notify you  
only of phone calls from numbers you select  
from Contacts.  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all  
messages.  
Voice Messages sets your phone not to  
sound a tone or vibrate when you receive  
voice messages.  
Text Messages sets your phone not to sound  
a tone or vibrate when you receive text  
messages.  
3 If you set the Phone option to Some Contacts,  
select up to 5 Contacts entries that contain  
phone numbers you want to be notified of calls  
from.  
When you are finished, press A under Done.  
All sets your phone not to sound a tone or  
vibrate when you receive any message.  
4 To set filtering options for Walkie-Talkie calls  
and Talkgroup calls, select DC/GC.  
157  
   
Profiles  
Note: When you receive a message you have  
set not to sound a tone or vibrate, the  
message notification screen still appears.  
8 Press A under Done.  
158  
6 Press O.  
Shortcuts  
Shortcuts lets you access most menu options by  
pressing a number on your keypad (1 through 9) or  
saying the voice name of the shortcut. You create  
the shortcut and then use it to take you to that  
screen any time.  
7 If you want to record a voice name for the  
shortcut: Select Voice. As directed by the  
screen prompts, say and repeat the name you  
want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into  
the microphone.  
8 Press A under Done.  
9 If the number key you chose is already assigned  
to a shortcut, a prompt appears asking if you  
want to replace the existing shortcut.  
Creating a Shortcut  
Note: When you receive your phone, all number  
keys may already be assigned to  
shortcuts. If this is the case, you can  
create new shortcuts by deleting or  
replacing existing shortcuts.  
Press A under Yes to replace the existing  
shortcut. -or-  
Press A under No if you want to keep the  
existing shortcut and assign another number key  
to the shortcut.  
1 Go to the menu item you want to create a  
shortcut for.  
Using a Shortcut  
If you know the shortcut number:  
For example, if you want to create a shortcut to  
the screen for creating a new Contacts entry:  
From the main menu, select Contacts, then  
highlight [New Contact].  
1 From the idle screen, press m.  
2 On your keypad, press the number assigned to  
the shortcut.  
2 Press and hold m until a confirmation screen  
appears.  
If you do not know the shortcut number:  
3 Press O or press A under Yes.  
4 Select Key.  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
5 Press the number key you want to assign to the  
shortcut.  
159  
           
Shortcuts  
2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to use. -or-  
3 Press A under Edit.  
4 With Key or Voice highlighted, press O to  
If you assigned a voice name to the shortcut:  
Press and hold t. Say the voice name into your  
phone. The shortcut with that voice name is then  
highlighted.  
change assignments.  
Deleting Shortcuts  
To delete a shortcut:  
3 Press O.  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
Editing a Shortcut  
To change the number assigned to a shortcut:  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Reorder.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
To delete all shortcuts:  
4 Scroll to the shortcut you want to move.  
5 Press A under Grab.  
6 Scroll to the place where you want the shortcut  
to appear.  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
7 Press A under Insert.  
8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all the items  
you want to move.  
9 Press A under Done.  
To change the number or voice name assigned to  
a shortcut:  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 Highlight any shortcut.  
160  
       
Attaching a Headset  
1 Lift the stereo headset jack cover.  
2 Insert the headset connector firmly into the  
stereo headset jack. You may have to rotate the  
headset connector until it fits securely into the  
stereo headset jack.  
Using a Headset  
If you use a headset or similar device with your  
phone, you can set your phone to send incoming  
sound to the headset only, or to the headset and  
the speaker at the same time.  
Note: The preferred connection to your phone is  
a wired audio device. If you insert a wired  
headset into the stereo headset jack on  
your phone, audio will be routed to the  
wired headset and you will lose your  
Bluetooth headset connection.  
Tip: For optimum performance, the headset  
should be worn on the same side of your  
body as the phone.  
Using a Remote Walkie-Talkie  
Button  
If you are using a headset or other accessory with  
a remote Walkie-Talkie button, you can use the  
remote Walkie-Talkie button for phone calls,  
Walkie-Talkie calls, and Group Walkie-Talkie calls.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Headset/Spkr.  
2 Select HdsetOnly to send incoming sound to  
the headset only. -or-  
Select Hdset&Spkr to send incoming sound to  
the headset and ring tones to the speaker.  
For phone calls, use the remote Walkie-Talkie  
button to answer calls, switch between calls, and  
end calls. Hold the remote Walkie-Talkie button for  
less than 2 seconds to answer calls and switch  
between calls. Hold the remote Walkie-Talkie  
button for more than 2 seconds to end calls.  
Using a Bluetooth Headset  
You can use your i615 wirelessly with a Bluetooth  
headset. This type of wireless headset lets you  
connect quickly to devices that are within range.  
For Walkie-Talkie calls and Group Walkie-Talkie  
calls, use the remote Walkie-Talkie button as you  
would the Walkie-Talkie button on your phone.  
For more information, refer to your Bluetooth  
headset’s user guide.  
161  
               
Using a Headset  
Note: When using a headset, the Walkie-Talkie  
button on your phone works the same way  
as when you are not using a headset.  
Walkie-Talkie and Group Walkie-Talkie  
sounds will be heard through the headset.  
162  
Contact Us — If at any time you need online  
assistance with billing, product information,  
order status, or related matters, click on Contact  
Us. A variety of ways to contact us are available  
to you so that we can help answer your specific  
questions. Every effort will be made to address  
your inquiry within 24 hours.  
Nextel® Customer  
Service  
There are a number of features available with your  
Nextel service and your new i615 phone, so you  
may be overwhelmed at first. Relax! Nextel  
Customer Service is here to help.  
Or, call us at 1-800-639-6111 or dial 611 from your  
Nextel phone.  
Domestic Customer Service  
Visit www.sprint.com for a variety of customer  
services:  
Should you need help with or have questions  
about your phone’s features or operation, please  
contact us from a landline phone, so that we can  
walk through your phone’s features with you.  
Customer Support — provides helpful  
instructions on phones and services, service  
and repair options, product user guides,  
interactive product and service tutorials, phone  
software upgrades, and answers to frequently  
asked questions.  
Ιn accordance with Nextel’s Authorized Contact  
Policy, you will need to supply account specific  
information to validate that you are authorized to  
receive information about and make changes to  
the account. At minimum, we ask that you have  
your Personal Telephone Number (PTN) and  
Account number ready when you call. This will  
better enable us to provide you with the highest  
level of service possible.  
My Nextel — provides access to your account  
so you can pay bills online, add phones to your  
account, reset your voicemail password and  
much more.  
163  
   
Nextel® Customer Service  
Nextel Worldwide® Customer  
Service  
When traveling outside of the U.S. and Canada,  
call +1 (360) 662-5202 for your customer needs.  
This customer number is toll-free from your Nextel  
phone.  
International coverage, rates, and other  
information is available on www.sprint.com.  
164  
 
(“Customer”), and the Sprint Nextel Corporation  
local operating affiliate authorized to provide  
service in the geographic region in which  
Nextel National Network  
General Terms and  
Conditions  
Customer's billing address is located (“Sprint”).  
These services may include, but are not limited to,  
wireless calling, Direct Connect® walkie-talkie  
services, Nationwide Direct Connect® walkie-talkie  
services, Group ConnectSM walkie-talkie services, “  
“Wireless Data Services” (including, but not limited  
to, wireless Web services, email services, text  
messaging, multimedia messaging and other  
mobile messaging services) and other related  
services and features. Together, the services  
selected by Customer make up Customer's  
“Service Plan” and are collectively referred to in  
this Agreement as the “Service” provided to  
Customer. Service is accessible to Customer  
through the telephone, data, email or messaging  
code or number(s) or email address(es)  
Thanks for choosing Sprint. These terms and  
conditions are part of your agreement with Sprint  
for NEXTEL (iDEN) Services. Separate terms  
apply for any PCS (CDMA) products or services.  
Please note these terms may not be the most  
current version. You can get a current version of  
the terms on our Web site at www.sprint.com or by  
requesting a copy from us at 1-888-211-4PCS.  
A para solicitar esta literatura en español, por favor  
contactar a 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).  
(collectively, the “Number(s)”) assigned to  
Customer's account. This Agreement also governs  
the purchase and or use of Customer's cellular  
phone (“Phone”), BlackBerry®, radio equipment  
and all other related equipment or devices and the  
software applications loaded on any of the same  
used in connection with the Service (“Equipment”).  
This Agreement governs the entire relationship  
between Customer and Sprint regarding  
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT YOU READ THIS  
ENTIRE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY  
GENERAL. This wireless service agreement (the  
“Agreement”), consisting of the Customer  
Expectations Checklist, these Nextel National  
Network General Terms and Conditions, Plan  
Information, and the Customer Order, is an  
agreement between you individually or, if a  
business, your business entity or corporation  
Equipment or Services using the Nextel National  
Network, and supersedes all earlier versions of any  
165  
 
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
agreement between Customer and Nextel  
Communications, Inc., or any of its subsidiaries or  
affiliates (“Nextel”), regarding Equipment or  
Services using the Nextel National Network.  
Separate terms apply for any Equipment or  
Services using the Sprint PCS National Network.  
Customer acknowledges receipt of detailed  
information (“Plan Information”) for each Service  
selected by Customer. ALL PLAN INFORMATION  
IS MADE PART OF THIS AGREEMENT AND  
SHOULD BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED BY  
CUSTOMER. If Plan Information conflicts with this  
Agreement, this Agreement shall govern. IN  
CONSIDERATION OF THE PAYMENTS AND  
THE MUTUAL COVENANTS AND CONDITIONS  
SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, SPRINT  
AND CUSTOMER AGREE AS FOLLOWS:  
ACCEPTS THE AGREEMENT. Customer  
acknowledges that Sprint will rely on the credit  
information furnished by Customer (“Credit  
Information”) and Customer's credit history to  
determine whether to provide Service to Customer.  
Customer consents to Sprint's requests for and  
verification of Customer's bank references and  
authorizes Sprint to assess Customer's  
creditworthiness from time to time by contacting  
standard commercial credit reference services.  
Customer represents and warrants that all Credit  
Information is current, complete and accurate.  
Sprint may require Customer to update its Credit  
Information from time to time, and Customer  
agrees to notify Sprint immediately of any change  
to its Credit Information. SPRINT MAY, AT ANY  
TIME, TERMINATE THE SERVICE OF ANY  
CUSTOMER THAT DOES NOT PROVIDE  
CURRENT, COMPLETE AND ACCURATE  
CREDIT INFORMATION. Sprint may, at any time  
in its sole discretion, place restrictions on  
Customer's use of Service, including but not limited  
to, a limitation on the amount of charges Customer  
may incur with respect to any Number. In this  
event, Sprint shall provide reasonable notice to  
Customer. Customer acknowledges that Sprint  
may provide Customer's payment history and other  
billing/charge information regarding the Service or  
Equipment to any credit reporting agency or  
industry clearinghouse.  
1 ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
Customer will have accepted and be bound by this  
Agreement if Customer (1) provides Sprint with a  
written or electronic signature; (2) otherwise  
indicates electronically that Customer accepts; or  
(3) activates Service through the Equipment.  
Creditworthiness of Customer. Customer must  
complete a credit application (“Credit Application”)  
before Service may be provided to Customer. THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL NOT BE EFFECTIVE  
UNTIL SPRINT APPROVES CUSTOMER'S  
CREDIT APPLICATION AND OTHERWISE  
166  
Deposits. Sprint may, at any time in its sole  
discretion, require a deposit (“Deposit”) from  
Customer to be held as a guarantee of payment.  
Customer grants to Sprint a security interest in any  
Deposit to secure all current or future amounts  
owed to Sprint. The Deposit may be mixed with  
other funds and will not earn interest, except as  
required by applicable law. Customer may not use  
the Deposit to pay Customer's bills or to extend  
payment. Sprint may, at any time, determine that  
Customer's Deposit is insufficient and, upon notice  
to Customer, require an increase in the Deposit to  
the extent permitted by law. In this event,  
Customer must either furnish the increased  
Deposit to Sprint within a reasonable time of its  
receipt of notice or terminate the Agreement during  
this period without incurring any liability for early  
termination. If Customer does not furnish Sprint  
with the increased Deposit amount or terminate the  
Agreement and pay to Sprint all amounts  
Customer owes to Sprint in a timely manner, Sprint  
may terminate the Agreement and Customer shall  
be liable to Sprint for early termination in  
accordance with Section 7 below. Sprint will apply  
the Deposit against any amount owed to Sprint at  
the end of the first billing cycle following the date  
that is one year from when Sprint received the  
deposit (“Application Date”), or, if earlier, upon  
termination of the Agreement or such other time as  
required by law. Sprint will return the Deposit (or  
any remaining balance) to Customer within ninety  
(90) days (or such shorter period as may be  
required by law) after termination of the  
Agreement. After the Application Date and upon  
Customer's request, Sprint will return to Customer  
within thirty (30) days of such request any balance  
remaining on the Deposit. Deposits will be returned  
to Customer, in whole or in part, at Customer's last  
known address. If required by law, Sprint will  
forward to appropriate state authorities any  
remaining balance that the postal service is unable  
to deliver to Customer.  
2 AGREEMENT TERM. The term of this  
Agreement for each Number is set forth on the  
Customer Order section of this Agreement (as  
acknowledged by Customer) and shall begin on  
the date Customer accepts the Agreement in  
accordance with Section 1 above, and, except as  
provided elsewhere in this Agreement, shall end  
thirty (30) days after either Sprint or Customer  
gives notice of its intent to terminate. Customer  
may be required to commit to a fixed one or  
two-year minimum term (“Minimum Term”),  
depending on: (1) the Service Plan or Service  
features selected; (2) the Equipment purchase  
price paid by Customer; or (3) Customer's  
participation in a promotion. CUSTOMER MAY  
ALSO BE REQUIRED TO COMMIT TO A NEW  
MINIMUM TERM IF CUSTOMER CHANGES  
SERVICE PLANS OR UPGRADES EQUIPMENT  
167  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
DURING ANY EXISTING TERM OR MINIMUM  
TERM. IF CUSTOMER IS SUBJECT TO A  
MINIMUM TERM, CUSTOMER SHALL  
NOTICE TO CUSTOMER OF ANY MATERIAL  
MODIFICATION. Such notice may be provided in  
the form of a letter, postcard, separate invoice  
insert, message printed on the monthly invoice,  
text message, or other printed or electronic form. If  
the modification is material and adverse to  
PURCHASE SERVICE FOR THE FULL TERM  
AND, UNLESS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THIS  
AGREEMENT, PAY DAMAGES TO SPRINT (AS  
DISCUSSED IN SECTION 7 BELOW) IF THE  
AGREEMENT IS TERMINATED BEFORE  
COMPLETION OF THE MINIMUM TERM.  
Customer will not be liable to Sprint for early  
termination if service is terminated under the  
applicable return policy. Information about Sprint's  
return policy, if applicable, will be made available to  
Customer at the place of sale and will become a  
part of this Agreement. Sprint may extend the  
Minimum Term by any period of time during which  
Service was suspended to Customer or during time  
on a seasonal Service Plan. Upon completion of  
the term, this Agreement shall automatically renew  
on a month-to-month basis. Sprint may, in its sole  
discretion, decide not to renew this Agreement at  
any time before completion of the term or any  
renewal period.  
Customer (e.g., the modification increases the  
monthly Service Plan rates charged to Customer or  
decreases the number of minutes included in the  
Customer's monthly Service Plan) and Customer  
does not agree to accept the modification,  
Customer may terminate this Agreement and not  
owe Sprint invoice charges resulting from the  
Sprint material modification or an early termination  
fee by notifying Sprint within sixty (60) calendar  
days after the effective date of the modification.  
The effective date of the modification will be set  
forth in the written notice provided to Customer.  
Final invoicing and charges following termination  
shall be calculated and finalized in accordance with  
Sections 7 and 8 of this Agreement. If Customer  
does not terminate the Agreement during the sixty  
(60) day period, Customer will have agreed to  
accept the modification and the modification shall  
have retroactive effect to its effective date.  
3 CHANGES TO AGREEMENT. SUBJECT TO  
APPLICABLE LAW, SPRINT MAY, AT ANY TIME  
IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, MODIFY ANY OF  
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS  
AGREEMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO THE RATES IT CHARGES TO CUSTOMER.  
SPRINT WILL PROVIDE ADVANCE WRITTEN  
4 USE OF SERVICE OR EQUIPMENT. Customer  
shall not use the Service or the Equipment in any  
unlawful manner (including, but not limited to, use  
in any aircraft or motor vehicle where prohibited by  
law, ordinance, or regulation), or in a manner that  
168  
may be abusive, harassing, threatening or  
fraudulent. Customer is solely responsible for all  
content transmitted using the Service or the  
Equipment and shall not use the Service or  
Equipment to communicate any (1) harassing,  
threatening, defamatory, pornographic or obscene  
messages; (2) unsolicited commercial messages;  
or (3) unsolicited commercial and/or bulk text or  
SMS messages. Customer shall not use the  
Service or Equipment in a manner that could result  
in damage or risk to the business, reputation,  
properties, or services of Sprint or to Sprint's or  
Nextel's subscribers, third parties or to the public  
generally. Accordingly, by way of example,  
Customer shall not attempt to gain unauthorized  
access to the Service or any account on the  
Service, use the Service to infringe the copyright of  
another, or upload or transmit any “virus”, “worm”  
or other malicious code. Customer shall not  
modify, disassemble, deinstall or alter the  
Equipment in any manner, except in accordance  
with the use instructions accompanying the  
Equipment. Customer may not resell or lease the  
Service or the Equipment to any other person or  
party.  
any change requested by Customer. Sprint may, at  
any time, change or remove any Number assigned  
to Customer when such change is reasonably  
necessary in the conduct of Sprint's business.  
Customer acknowledges that Customer has no  
proprietary or ownership rights or interest in  
Customer's Number(s) and cannot acquire such  
rights or interest through usage, publication or  
otherwise. Customer may not assign its Number to  
any other Equipment and shall not program any  
other Number into its Equipment. If wireless  
number portability becomes available in  
Customer's Service Area, Customer may request  
that its Phone number(s) be ported to another  
service provider. Upon such request, all amounts  
then owed to Sprint (including damages for early  
termination and any amounts that appear on the  
final invoice) shall become immediately due and  
payable, and Customer's failure to provide timely  
payment to Sprint could delay Sprint's facilitation of  
Customer's request.  
5 WIRELESS DATA SERVICES. Wireless Data  
Services consist of applications such as email,  
data, information and other wireless Internet  
services (“Online Applications”). Customer  
acknowledges that no guarantee or assurance  
exists that the Online Applications will be  
compatible, or, if currently compatible, will continue  
to be compatible, with Sprint's network or with  
Customer's Equipment or Service. Sprint does not  
Change in Service/Number. Any change in the  
Service or the Equipment may require additional  
programming or Equipment or changes to  
Numbers assigned to Customer. Customer may be  
assessed a programming fee in connection with  
169  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
endorse any Online Application, even if currently  
compatible with Sprint's network or with  
proprietary interests in certain Content. Customer  
shall not, and will not permit others, to reverse  
engineer, reproduce, broadcast, distribute, sell,  
publish, commercially exploit or otherwise  
disseminate any Content in any manner without  
the prior written consent of Sprint, the Content  
providers, or others with proprietary interests in  
such Content, as applicable. Customer's use of the  
Content is strictly limited to the Customer's own  
use solely in connection with the Equipment.  
Customer will be required to cease using the  
Content if Customer fails to comply with this  
Section 5 or any part of this Agreement.  
Customer's Equipment or Service. Sprint may, at  
any time in its sole discretion, disable or  
discontinue any Online Application for any reason.  
Use of Wireless Data Services requires Internet  
compatible Equipment, and is subject to applicable  
storage, memory or other Equipment limitations.  
Only certain Internet sites may be accessed by  
Customer, and certain Wireless Data Services may  
not be available in all areas where Service is  
provided.  
Content. Customer may, from time to time, access  
through Wireless Data Services statements,  
opinions, graphics, photos, music, services and  
other information (“Content”), including Content  
provided by third parties. Customer acknowledges  
that Sprint offers no guarantee or assurance  
regarding the accuracy, completeness,  
appropriateness or utility of the Content. Customer  
also acknowledges that Sprint does not publish  
and is in no way responsible for any Content that is  
provided by third parties. Customer also may  
establish contact with third parties through  
Wireless Data Services. Sprint is not responsible  
for the actions of third parties contacted by  
Customer, whether such contact was initiated by  
Customer or was brought about through an  
embedded link on the Equipment. Content  
providers and others have copyright and other  
Network Security. Sprint may take any action that  
it deems necessary to (1) protect its network, its  
rights or the rights of its customers and third  
parties; or (2) optimize or improve its network, its  
Services and the Equipment. Customer  
acknowledges that such action may include,  
without limitation, employing methods,  
technologies, or procedures to filter or block  
messages sent through Wireless Data Services.  
Sprint may, in its sole and absolute discretion, at  
any time, filter “spam” or prevent “hacking,”  
“viruses” or other potential harms without regard to  
any Customer preference.  
170  
Application Support. Sprint is often not the  
developer of Online Applications that are  
public safety emergencies or when system  
capacity is otherwise limited to limit access to the  
Nextel National Network for those customers that  
are not then using the Service and connected to  
the network in order to facilitate communications  
by public safety organizations such as police and  
fire departments. In this event, customers that  
have priority access Service as part of their Service  
Plan will be given access to the Nextel National  
Network before Sprint's non-priority access  
customers. Sprint will not complete calls to 900,  
976 or similar numbers for pay-per-call services.  
Caller identification information may not be  
available for all incoming calls. International calling  
may be blocked.  
7 RATES AND CHARGES. Customer shall pay in  
full all charges for Services provided under this  
Agreement and any Service Plan that becomes  
part of this Agreement, including monthly service  
charges, usage charges, taxes, assessments and  
any additional fees or charges imposed on  
Customer or on Sprint and associated with the  
Service or the Equipment. Customer is responsible  
for all charges or purchases associated with  
Customer's Number and Equipment whether or not  
Customer was the user of the Service or  
accessible through Wireless Data Services.  
Therefore, if Customer contacts Sprint's Customer  
Service department regarding use of an Online  
Application, Customer may be referred to the  
customer service department of the developer of  
the Online Application, and Sprint shall not be  
obligated to support any such Online Application.  
6 SERVICE AVAILABILITY. Service is generally  
available to Customer when Customer is within the  
operating range of the Nextel National Network or  
within the range of a provider with which Sprint has  
a reciprocal service arrangement (“Service Area”).  
Customer acknowledges that any map, diagram or  
other illustration of Customer's Service Area is only  
an estimate and actual service coverage may vary.  
CUSTOMER'S SERVICE AREA IS SUBJECT TO  
CHANGE AT ANY TIME IN SPRINT'S SOLE  
DISCRETION. Service quality and availability  
within Customer's Service Area is also affected by  
conditions Sprint does not control, including the  
Equipment, problems associated with  
interconnecting carriers, power failures, “viruses”,  
obstructions such as buildings or trees, tunnels,  
atmospheric, geographic or topographical  
authorized its use. If Customer fails to pay any  
amounts when due under this Agreement,  
Customer shall be in default and Sprint shall be  
conditions and other conditions. Service also may  
be limited or temporarily unavailable due to system  
capacity limitations or system repairs or  
modifications. Sprint also may be required during  
171  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
entitled to exercise any remedies available to it  
under this Agreement or at law or in equity.  
“toll-free” calls to 800, 866, 877, 888 and other  
toll-free numbers. Customer also may be charged  
for the use of special Services such as 411  
services, operator-assisted calls or call-forwarding.  
Airtime charges will be assessed for the entire  
period during which a call or Direct Connect®  
transmission is connected to the Nextel National  
Network. A wireless call connection begins  
approximately when Customer presses the button  
to initiate an outgoing call or the phone starts  
ringing for an incoming call and ends  
Service Charges. Customer shall pay all charges  
for Services selected by Customer as indicated on  
the Customer Order section of this Agreement as  
part of Customer's Service Plan, and any additional  
Services selected by Customer. Customer's  
Service Plan will be offered at the rates and subject  
to the conditions set forth in the Service Plan  
Information provided to Customer at the time of  
sale. CUSTOMER'S SERVICE PLAN  
INFORMATION SHALL BE CONSIDERED PART  
OF THIS AGREEMENT. Rates charged to  
Customer include monthly access charges and  
may include activation and other fees associated  
with features such as voicemail and caller  
approximately when the first party terminates the  
call. Customer shall be responsible for all charges  
for incoming and outgoing wireless calls that are  
answered. A Direct Connect® or Group ConnectSM  
transmission occurs approximately when Customer  
presses the button to initiate a transmission and  
ends approximately six (6) seconds after  
identification. Monthly access charges shall begin  
once Customer's Service is activated, which may  
occur before Customer receives the Equipment.  
completion of a communication (i.e., when  
Customer or another participant releases the  
button) to which no participant responds. Customer  
initiates a new Direct Connect® or Group  
Usage Charges. Depending on the Service Plan  
selected, Customer may incur usage charges for  
Services such as: wireless calling, Direct  
ConnectSM transmission if Customer responds  
more than six (6) seconds after the other  
Connect®, Nationwide Direct Connect®, Group  
ConnectSM, Wireless Data Services and other  
Services that may be offered from time to time.  
Usage charges may vary depending on how,  
where and when Customer uses the Service.  
Customer may be assessed long distance charges  
(including international calling) or other charges for  
participant completes a communication.  
Nationwide Direct Connect® calls use the Direct  
Connect® minutes in Customer's plan and incur an  
additional access charge. Airtime charges for  
Direct Connect® or Group ConnectSM  
transmissions or Nationwide Direct Connect®  
172  
access are charged to the customer that initiates  
the transmission and, unless a rate plan includes  
unlimited transmissions or access, are calculated  
by multiplying the duration of the transmission  
(including the six (6) second period referred to  
above) by the applicable rate and the number of  
participants. Customer will not be charged for  
sending or receiving call alert transmissions (“Call  
Alerts”), but will be deemed to have initiated a new  
Direct Connect® transmission if Customer  
WIRELESS CALLS AND AT LEAST SIX (6)  
SECONDS OF AIRTIME FOR ALL DIRECT  
CONNECT® TRANSMISSIONS, REGARDLESS  
OF LENGTH. AFTER THE INITIAL MINUTE,  
AIRTIME CHARGES FOR WIRELESS CALLING  
ARE ROUNDED-UP AND BILLED TO THE NEXT  
SECOND OR TO THE NEXT MINUTE,  
DEPENDING ON CUSTOMER'S SERVICE PLAN.  
AFTER SIX (6) SECONDS, DIRECT CONNECT®  
TRANSMISSIONS ARE ROUNDED-UP AND  
BILLED TO THE NEXT SECOND. DATA USAGE  
FOR WIRELESS DATA SERVICES IS ROUNDED  
TO THE NEAREST ONE-TENTH (1/10) OF A  
KILOBYTE.  
responds to a Call Alert, even if Customer  
responds within six (6) seconds of receiving the  
Call Alert. Text and numeric messaging will be  
charged on a per message basis; however,  
Customer may elect to purchase a certain number  
of messages for a fixed monthly price. Any  
Taxes, Fees and Assessments. Customer shall  
pay all federal, state, and local taxes and fees that  
are imposed on transactions subject to this  
messages in excess of Customer's allotted  
messages will be charged at the per message rate.  
Depending on the plan, Customer may be charged  
on a per kilobyte basis (one megabyte equals 1024  
kilobytes and one kilobyte equals 1024 bytes), for  
Customer's use of Wireless Data Services.  
Kilobytes may be used for, without limitation,  
browsing the Internet, accessing Wireless Data  
Services and for reading, sending and responding  
to email. Airtime minutes allotted to Customer  
under Customer's wireless calling plan may be  
used in connection with certain Wireless Data  
Services. CUSTOMERS ARE CHARGED AT  
LEAST ONE (1) MINUTE OF AIRTIME FOR ALL  
Agreement. Customer shall not be responsible for  
taxes and fees imposed on Sprint's net income or  
property. Customer shall be responsible for all  
taxes and fees (whether imposed upon Customer  
or Sprint) that are measured by gross receipts from  
sales made to Customer or imposed as a perline or  
per-unit charge. Applicable taxes and fees include,  
but are not limited to, the following: federal, state,  
and local excise taxes, sales and transaction  
taxes, gross receipts taxes, utility taxes, and  
statutory 911 fees. If Customer is eligible for an  
exemption from any tax or fee, Customer must  
provide Sprint with a valid and properly executed  
173  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
exemption certificate for the exemption to be  
effective. Customer shall provide Sprint with the  
Primary Place of Use (i.e., Customer's residential  
street address or primary business address) for  
each unit activated on Customer's account, and  
notify Sprint of any changes in such address.  
Additional fees and assessments apply to  
Customer's monthly Service Plan. The charges  
may change and may vary depending on where  
Customer is located. The charges include, but are  
not limited to, a Universal Service Fund  
Early Termination Component of Rate  
Structure. Sprint incurs a significant cost in  
activating Service to Customer, including a large  
up-front cost in offering Equipment to Customer.  
These costs are partially recouped over the length  
of Customer's Agreement with Sprint through  
monthly service rate charges to Customer, which  
have been established in part for this purpose. If  
Customer breaches this Agreement or terminates  
Service for any reason (including by porting its  
Phone number to another service provider),  
Customer understands and acknowledges that  
Sprint will not receive the full benefit of its  
assessment and a Telephone Relay Service Fee.  
Sprint also imposes a Federal Programs Cost  
Recovery (“FPCR”) fee that is not a tax or  
Agreement with Customer, in part, because Sprint  
will not continue to receive monthly service  
charges from Customer. As a result, Sprint shall  
incur damages that are difficult, if not impossible, to  
determine. THEREFORE, IN THE CASE OF  
BREACH OR EARLY TERMINATION OF THE  
AGREEMENT BY CUSTOMER, CUSTOMER  
SHALL PAY TO SPRINT, AS LIQUIDATED  
DAMAGES AND NOT AS A PENALTY (IN  
ADDITION TO ALL AMOUNTS THEN OWED TO  
SPRINT), $200 FOR EACH NUMBER ASSIGNED  
TO CUSTOMER'S ACCOUNT AS A  
government mandated, but is kept by Sprint to  
recover Sprint's costs for complying with Federal  
Communications Commission (“FCC”) programs  
and mandates. The FPCR fee is subject to  
adjustment, and Sprint will provide advance notice  
to Customer through the “Sprint News” section of  
Customer's bill or a bill insert of any significant  
increase in the FPCR fee. Please consult the  
current Sprint pricing materials, a sales consultant  
or visit http://www.Sprint.com for information  
regarding the FPCR fee and the current amount of  
the fee. Additional fees may be added to  
REASONABLE ESTIMATE OF THE DAMAGES  
INCURRED BY SPRINT. This is intended to  
Customer's bill to recover Sprint's costs for funding  
government programs or initiatives.  
174  
maintain Sprint's overall rate at an acceptable level  
despite Customer's early termination and will be  
assessed without exception unless otherwise  
provided in this Agreement or by applicable law.  
Disputed Charges. Customer may dispute only  
those charges that Customer believes are the  
result of (1) a billing error; (2) a problem related to  
Customer's Service; or (3) dropped calls. To  
dispute any charge, Customer must pay all  
Failure to Pay. Customer acknowledges that time  
is of the essence with respect to all amounts owed  
to Sprint. IF CUSTOMER HAS NOT PAID ITS  
MONTHLY INVOICE IN FULL BY THE DUE  
DATE, A LATE PAYMENT CHARGE OF UP TO  
1.5% PER MONTH (18% ANNUALLY), OR SUCH  
LESSER AMOUNT PERMITTED BY LAW, MAY  
BE APPLIED TO THE TOTAL UNPAID BALANCE  
DUE AND OUTSTANDING. THIS LATE  
undisputed amounts when due and submit a  
written notice to Sprint within ninety (90) days of  
the date of the invoice. CUSTOMER WAIVES THE  
RIGHT TO DISPUTE ANY CHARGES FOR  
WHICH TIMELY NOTICE IS NOT PROVIDED TO  
SPRINT. Sprint shall resolve all disputed charges  
in its sole discretion. If Sprint determines that an  
error was made on Customer's invoice, Sprint will  
credit Customer's account in the amount of the  
error. If Sprint determines that a disputed charge  
was validly assessed upon Customer, Sprint will  
notify Customer and Customer must furnish the  
amount to Sprint within a reasonable period of  
time; or, if authorized by Customer, Sprint may  
instead charge Customer's credit card or debit card  
by any amount that was validly assessed. If  
Customer fails to pay any undisputed amount or,  
after a reasonable period of time, fails to pay any  
amount determined by Sprint to have been validly  
assessed upon Customer, Sprint may exercise any  
remedies available to Sprint under this Agreement  
for non-payment, including termination of the  
Agreement. Customer hereby acknowledges that  
PAYMENT CHARGE IS ASSESSED TO  
RECOVER COSTS FOR CUSTOMER'S FAILURE  
TO PAY AND SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE  
INTEREST. Sprint's acceptance of late or partial  
payments (even if marked “paid in full” or similar  
notations) shall not waive Sprint's right to collect  
the full amount due under this Agreement, plus any  
additional amounts charged under this paragraph.  
If Sprint obtains the services of a collection or  
repossession agency or an attorney to assist in  
remedying any breach of this Agreement by  
Customer, including but not limited to, Customer's  
nonpayment of charges, Customer shall be liable  
for this expense.  
175  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
he or she has read the explanation of rates and  
charges set forth in this Section 7 and understands  
that these rates and charges may be assessed  
upon Customer, to the extent applicable.  
higher-than-expected Services charges for the  
month in which such Services are billed. The  
creation of new cell sites, Sprint's implementation  
of new billing technology, delays in the reporting of  
international or other roaming charges between  
carriers, and other similar events may result in  
such delayed billing. Sprint may bill Customer on  
behalf of third party providers of Online  
8 BILLING. Sprint shall issue invoices for Service  
and for purchases of Equipment. Sprint's invoicing  
cycle is approximately thirty (30) days, but may  
change from time to time. The day of the month on  
which Customer receives an invoice may vary and  
is subject to change. Some billing details may be  
provided at http://www.Sprint.com and will not  
appear on invoices (except for a fee). Service  
charges will be invoiced to Customer in advance or  
in arrears, depending on the Service Plan, and  
usage charges will be invoiced in arrears.  
Applications that are accessed by Customer  
through the Equipment. Sprint may retain a  
percentage of these charges before providing the  
balance to the third party provider of such Online  
Application.  
9 PAYMENTS. Recurring Credit/Debit Card  
Payments - Customer may pay any amount owed  
to Sprint by using a credit or debit card acceptable  
to Sprint. If Customer wishes to pay all amounts in  
this manner on a recurring basis, Customer must  
complete a separate payment enrollment form  
(“Payment Form”). Customer acknowledges that  
upon signing the appropriate Payment Form, the  
Payment Form, including its applicable terms and  
conditions, will become a part of this Agreement.  
Customer shall promptly notify Sprint of any  
changes to the credit or debit card (e.g., if the card  
is terminated, lost, stolen or the expiration date  
changes) or bank account used for payment.  
Enrollment is for the duration of this Agreement  
unless cancelled earlier by either Customer or  
Customer may be assessed a shipping charge for  
Equipment delivered to Customer. Unless  
otherwise specified in Customer's Service Plan,  
any unused minutes or other allotted Services  
under Customer's Service Plan will not be carried  
over to any other billing cycle. If Customer's  
Service is terminated for any reason (including if  
Customer's Number is ported) before the end of  
any billing cycle, no credit or refund will be  
provided for unused minutes or other allotted  
Services and any monthly service charge will not  
be prorated to the date of termination. On  
occasion, Customer may be billed for Services in a  
month other than the month in which Customer  
used the Services, which may result in  
176  
Sprint upon thirty (30) days' advance written notice  
to the other party.  
of third parties) when due under this Agreement;  
(2) Customer behaves in an abusive, derogatory,  
or otherwise unreasonable manner to any Sprint  
employee, representative or agent; (3) Sprint has  
reason to believe that Customer's Service is being  
used in a fraudulent manner or for an illegal  
purpose (such as unusual activity levels or calling  
patterns); (4) Customer's Service is being used in a  
way that adversely affects other Customers'  
Service or Sprint's business operations; (5)  
Customer provides Credit Information that is false,  
inaccurate, dated or cannot be verified or  
Specific Form of Payment. Sprint may, at any  
time and from time to time, as it deems appropriate  
(e.g., following receipt of a dishonored check or  
other instrument), demand that Customer make  
payment by money order, cashier's check, or a  
similarly secure form of payment. Sprint also may  
require at any time in its sole discretion that the  
Equipment be purchased for cash only. In this  
case, title to the Equipment shall be transferred to  
Customer only after receipt by Sprint of a cashier's  
or certified check or other equally secure form of  
payment in the amount set forth on the Customer  
Order section of this Agreement.  
Customer becomes insolvent or subject to any  
proceeding under the Bankruptcy Code or similar  
laws; (6) Sprint discovers that Customer is  
underage or does not otherwise possess the  
capacity or the authorization to enter into this  
Agreement; (7) Customer's use of the Service or  
Equipment exceeds limitations or violates any  
restrictions placed on Customer's account or  
otherwise breaches this Agreement; or (8) Sprint,  
in its sole discretion, believes action is required to  
protect its interests or the interests of Customer or  
its other customers. SPRINT SHALL NOT BE  
LIABLE TO CUSTOMER OR TO ANY OTHER  
PARTY FOR EXERCISING OR FAILING TO  
EXERCISE ITS RIGHTS UNDER THIS SECTION  
TO LIMIT, SUSPEND OR TERMINATE SERVICE  
OR THE AGREEMENT. If Customer's Service is  
subject to fraudulent use, Customer shall  
Dishonored Checks. Sprint may charge  
Customer up to the highest amount permitted by  
law for any check or other instrument tendered by  
Customer and returned unpaid by a financial  
institution for any reason.  
10 SUSPENSION, LIMITATION OR  
TERMINATION OF SERVICE OR THIS  
AGREEMENT.  
General. Sprint may limit, suspend or terminate  
Customer's Service or this Agreement at any time  
and without providing notice to Customer if: (1)  
Customer fails to pay any charges (including,  
without limitation, any charges assessed on behalf  
177  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
immediately notify Sprint's Customer Service  
department, provide Sprint with any documentation  
and information that it requests and otherwise  
cooperate with Sprint in the investigation of such  
incident. If Sprint terminates Service to Customer,  
and Service is not reconnected within thirty (30)  
calendar days, all amounts owed to Sprint  
CUSTOMER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR  
EAVESDROPPING ON OR INTERCEPTION OF  
COMMUNICATIONS MADE WHILE USING THE  
SERVICE OR THE EQUIPMENT.  
911 or Other Emergency Calls. The Service does  
not interact with 911 and other emergency services  
in the same manner as non-wireless or landline  
telephone services. Depending on Customer's  
location, the type of Equipment being used, the  
type of equipment being utilized by any applicable  
emergency services provider, and the  
(including any damages for early termination) shall  
become immediately due and payable.  
Reactivation. Sprint may, but is not required to,  
reactivate Service to Customer after Service has  
been suspended or terminated in accordance with  
the previous subsection. Before Service may be  
reactivated, Customer must pay to Sprint all past  
due amounts plus a reconnection charge of up to  
$30.00 per Number, plus applicable taxes. Sprint  
may modify the terms of Service before  
circumstances and conditions of a particular call,  
Customer's phone number and/or location may not  
be identifiable to emergency services providers  
and Customer may not be connected to the  
appropriate emergency services provider. In  
certain circumstances, a 911 call may be routed to  
a state patrol dispatcher. Sprint is deploying  
wireless E911 compatible Equipment that meets  
applicable FCC requirements and that is designed  
to help public safety authorities locate users of the  
Service who make 911 calls. However, E911  
service that is compatible with the FCC technical  
requirements is not available in all areas, and even  
in those areas where it is available, it is not entirely  
reliable. Moreover, if Customer's Equipment is not  
GPS-enabled, emergency services personnel may  
have much less precise location information about  
the Customer, compared to the information  
reactivating Service to Customer and may require  
Customer to provide Sprint with an initial Deposit or  
an additional Deposit.  
11 RELEASE OF CUSTOMER INFORMATION.  
Privacy. Wireless systems use radio channels to  
transmit communications that may be accidentally  
or intentionally intercepted. Although federal and  
state laws may make it illegal for third parties to  
listen in on Customer's Service, privacy cannot be  
guaranteed. SPRINT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO  
available to them if Customer's Equipment was  
178  
GPS-enabled. The information available to  
emergency service providers may also be limited if  
Customer's number or numbers are in the process  
of being ported. Customer acknowledges that  
E911 service is not available in all areas, is not  
completely reliable and is further limited when  
using non-GPS enabled Equipment or during the  
number porting process. Customer consents to  
Sprint's disclosure of Customer information to  
governmental and public safety authorities in  
response to emergencies. This information may  
include, but is not limited to, Customer's name,  
address, Number, and the location of the user of  
the Service at the time of call.  
retaining the same phone number; (4) provide  
handset-based or network-based geographic  
information services via Sprint-provided or third  
party software applications; (5) comply with  
applicable law; or (6) respond to emergencies.  
Customer acknowledges that any information that  
identifies Customer (e.g., Customer's name and  
Number) and calls made by Customer may appear  
on the equipment or bill of a person or party that  
receives Customer's call. Sprint may access, use,  
disclose, record or monitor any communications to  
or from Customer or any other person to protect  
Sprint's rights or property or those of other  
customers, as permitted by law.  
Access, Use and Disclosure of Customer  
Information and Communications. Customer  
acknowledges and agrees that Sprint may access,  
use, and disclose to third parties, any information  
whether personally identifying information, or  
“customer proprietary network information”  
(“CPNI”) within the meaning of 47 U.S.C. § 222  
and its implementing regulations (“CPNI  
Regulations”) that Sprint collects, possesses or  
develops about Customer to: (1) provide Customer  
with Equipment, Service, or customer support; (2)  
conduct marketing activities in accordance with  
applicable law (Customer may opt out of any such  
marketing by contacting Sprint); (3) enable  
Customer to switch to a new service provider  
(either Sprint or another service provider) while  
Geographic Information Services. Consistent  
with the foregoing, Customer acknowledges and  
agrees that Sprint or a third party application  
service provider may access, use, and disclose to  
third parties the geographic location of Customer's  
Equipment to provide Customer with any  
geographic information service which Customer  
accesses through the Service or Equipment. If  
Customer utilizes any such service and there are  
additional users on Customer's account, Customer  
shall clearly, conspicuously, and regularly notify all  
individual users of the Service that location  
information (i.e., the geographic coordinates of the  
Equipment) may be accessed, used, or disclosed  
in connection with the Service. For any geographic  
information service that is governed by the CPNI  
179  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
regulations or a similar law, Sprint will provide  
Customer with a separate notice and opportunity to  
consent to the access, use, and disclosure of  
geographic information. CUSTOMER SHALL  
HOLD HARMLESS AND INDEMNIFY SPRINT  
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES,  
EXPENSES, DEMANDS, ACTIONS, OR CAUSES  
OF ACTION (INCLUDING ALL ACTIONS BY  
THIRD PARTIES) ARISING OUT OF A BREACH  
OF CUSTOMER'S OBLIGATION TO NOTIFY  
USERS AS SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION OR  
CUSTOMER'S USE OF ANY GEOGRAPHIC  
INFORMATION SERVICE OR LOCATION  
INFORMATION.  
connection with roaming to certain countries  
outside of the United States. SPRINT SHALL NOT  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES (INCLUDING  
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT) RESULTING  
FROM INSTALLATION OF THE EQUIPMENT BY  
CUSTOMER OR ANY THIRD PARTY. UPON  
CUSTOMER'S ACCEPTANCE OF DELIVERY OF  
THE EQUIPMENT, ALL RISK OF LOSS,  
DAMAGE, THEFT, OR DESTRUCTION TO THE  
EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BORNE BY THE  
CUSTOMER. NO LOSS, DAMAGE, THEFT, OR  
DESTRUCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT, IN  
WHOLE OR IN PART, SHALL IMPAIR  
CUSTOMER'S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS  
AGREEMENT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, CUSTOMER'S RESPONSIBILITY  
FOR THE PAYMENT OF SERVICE CHARGES  
DUE UNDER THE AGREEMENT.  
12 EQUIPMENT. Customer shall provide Sprint  
with an initial payment in the amount set forth on  
the Customer Order section of this Agreement to  
be applied towards any amount owed to Sprint one  
(1) year from the effective date of the Agreement.  
Customer acknowledges that Sprint is not  
responsible for the Equipment or its installation.  
Sprint is not responsible for the operation, quality  
of transmission, or, unless separate maintenance  
arrangements have been made between Sprint  
and Customer, for maintenance of the Equipment.  
Customer further acknowledges that Equipment  
purchased from Sprint is not compatible with and  
will not support services provided by other wireless  
carriers, except for those services provided by an  
entity operating compatible iDEN equipment or in  
Insurance. Customer may purchase Direct Protect  
insurance (“Direct Protect”) to protect Customer  
against loss, theft, incidental damage or accidents  
involving Customer's Equipment. However, Direct  
Protect is not available for certain Equipment.  
Customer acknowledges that Direct Protect  
insurance is provided by The Signal  
Telecommunications Insurance Services (“Signal”)  
and not by Sprint. If Customer selects Direct  
Protect coverage, Customer will be assessed a  
monthly charge, which Sprint will remit to Signal on  
Customer's behalf. Any requests for information or  
180  
claims regarding Direct Protect shall be directed to  
Signal. Customer acknowledges having received a  
summary of coverage, including deductible  
information, which is also available by calling  
Signal at 1-888-352-9182.  
AS WARRANTIES BY SPRINT OF ANY KIND.  
CUSTOMER ASSUMES ALL RESPONSIBILITY  
FOR USE OF THE SERVICE AND THE QUALITY  
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT.  
CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT SERVICE  
MAY NOT BE ERROR-FREE AND THAT  
Lost or Stolen Equipment. If Customer's  
INTERRUPTIONS WILL LIKELY OCCUR FROM  
TIME TO TIME. SPRINT DOES NOT  
Equipment is lost or stolen, Customer agrees to:  
(1) notify Sprint within two calendar days by calling  
Sprint's Customer Service department; (2) provide  
Sprint with any documentation and information that  
it requests; and (3) otherwise cooperate with Sprint  
in the investigation of such incident.  
MANUFACTURE THE EQUIPMENT AND ANY  
STATEMENT REGARDING THE EQUIPMENT  
SHOULD NOT BE INTERPRETED AS A  
WARRANTY. THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE  
TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
13 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. SPRINT  
MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR  
14 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES  
FOR BREACH. Sprint shall not be liable for: (1)  
any deficiency in the Service, including, but not  
limited to, mistakes, omissions, interruptions  
(including, among others, interruptions caused by  
Equipment or facilities failure or shortages), errors,  
failures to transmit, delays or defects, network  
problems, lack of coverage or network capacity,  
dropped calls, inability to access the Service or  
inability to place or receive calls or problems of  
unauthorized access; (2) the unavailability or any  
failure or delay in delivery of the Equipment or the  
cancellation of any orders of Equipment by the  
manufacturer; (3) any suspension or termination of  
Service by Sprint or any other action taken by  
Sprint in its sole discretion intended to protect the  
Sprint wireless network, systems, and the rights or  
WARRANTIES, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,  
ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE  
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT CONCERNING  
CUSTOMER'S SERVICE OR THE EQUIPMENT.  
SPRINT DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ANYONE TO  
MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY  
ON ITS BEHALF, AND CUSTOMER SHOULD  
NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH STATEMENT(S). ANY  
STATEMENTS MADE IN PACKAGING,  
MANUALS OR OTHER DOCUMENTS, OR BY  
ANY SPRINT EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR  
REPRESENTATIVES, ARE PROVIDED FOR  
INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY AND NOT  
181  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
property of Sprint, its Customers, or others from  
“hacking,” “spamming,” “viruses” or other potential  
harms that Sprint believes may adversely impact  
its network or systems; (4) the availability or use of  
Wireless Data Services, including but not limited  
to, the compatibility or use of Online Applications or  
Content, whether or not supported by Sprint, or any  
contact with third parties through the use of  
Wireless Data Services; (5) any damage or  
personal injury allegedly caused by use of the  
Equipment or Service; (6) any other damage due  
directly or indirectly to causes beyond Sprint's  
control, including, but not limited to, any act or  
omission of any carrier or service provider other  
than Sprint; or (7) acts of God, acts of public  
enemies, acts of the government, acts or failure to  
act of Customer, its agents, employees or  
subcontractors, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine  
restrictions, corrosive substances in the air or other  
hazardous environmental conditions, strikes,  
freight embargoes, inability to obtain materials or  
services, commotion, war, terrorism, unusually  
severe weather conditions or default of Sprint's  
subcontractors. WITHOUT LIMITING THE  
FOR THE PERIOD OF SERVICE DISRUPTION.  
EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE SET FORTH IN THE  
PRECEDING SENTENCE, IN NO EVENT SHALL  
SPRINT BE LIABLE FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES OR  
FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL  
OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES CAUSED BY  
ITS NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE, NOR FOR  
ECONOMIC LOSS, PERSONAL INJURIES OR  
PROPERTY DAMAGE SUSTAINED BY  
CUSTOMER OR ANY THIRD PARTIES. IF  
CUSTOMER IS PROVIDED WITH A CREDIT  
ALLOWANCE UNDER THIS SECTION, SPRINT  
SHALL BE SUBROGATED TO ANY AND ALL  
RIGHTS THAT CUSTOMER MAY HAVE  
AGAINST ANY THIRD PARTY AS A RESULT OF  
CUSTOMER'S LOSS OR EXPENSE, INCLUDING  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY RIGHT CUSTOMER  
MAY HAVE UNDER THE TELEPHONE  
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT. THIS SECTION  
14 SHALL SURVIVE TERMINATION OF THIS  
AGREEMENT. UNDER CERTAIN  
CIRCUMSTANCES, SOME JURISDICTIONS  
MAY NOT RECOGNIZE OR GIVE EFFECT, IN  
WHOLE OR IN PART, TO WARRANTY  
FOREGOING, SPRINT'S SOLE LIABILITY FOR  
SERVICE DISRUPTION, WHETHER CAUSED BY  
THE NEGLIGENCE OF SPRINT OR  
DISCLAIMERS AND/OR LIMITATIONS OF  
REMEDIES FOR BREACH; AND THEREFORE,  
TO THE EXTENT THAT THE DISCLAIMER SET  
FORTH IN SECTION 13 AND THE LIMITATION  
OF REMEDIES IN SECTION 14 ARE NOT  
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THEY WILL  
OTHERWISE, IS LIMITED TO A CREDIT  
ALLOWANCE OF NOT MORE THAN THE  
PROPORTIONATE CHARGE TO CUSTOMER  
182  
NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER OR SHALL ONLY  
APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY SUCH  
APPLICABLE LAW.  
Mandatory Arbitration. CUSTOMER AND  
SPRINT AGREE TO ARBITRATE ANY CLAIM,  
CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER  
OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
SERVICE (OR ANY PRIOR ORAL OR WRITTEN  
AGREEMENT FOR WIRELESS SERVICE WITH  
SPRINT OR NEXTEL) EXCEPT THAT  
CUSTOMER OR SPRINT MAY BRING AN  
INDIVIDUAL ACTION IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT.  
CUSTOMER AND SPRINT ACKNOWLEDGE  
THAT THIS AGREEMENT EVIDENCES A  
TRANSACTION IN INTERSTATE COMMERCE  
AND THAT THE FEDERAL ARBITRATION ACT  
SHALL GOVERN THE INTERPRETATION AND  
ENFORCEMENT OF THIS ARBITRATION  
PROVISION. TO INITIATE ARBITRATION,  
CUSTOMER OR SPRINT MUST FIRST SEND A  
WRITTEN NOTICE, VIA CERTIFIED MAIL, TO  
THE OTHER PARTY INDICATING ITS INTENT  
TO ARBITRATE, WHICH NOTICE SHALL  
INCLUDE: (1) A DESCRIPTION OF THE FACTS;  
(2) A DESCRIPTION OF THE NATURE OF THE  
CLAIM; AND (3) THE RELIEF SOUGHT (“NOTICE  
TO ARBITRATE”). SEND NOTICE TO  
15 INDEMNIFICATION. Customer shall indemnify,  
defend, and hold Sprint harmless from any  
violation by Customer of any applicable law or  
regulation. Customer will further indemnify Sprint  
for any claim or demand, including reasonable  
attorneys' fees, made by any third party due to or  
arising out of: (1) information or Content that  
Customer submits, posts, transmits or makes  
available through the Service; (2) Customer's use  
of the Service or Equipment; (3) Customer's  
connection to the Service or Equipment; (4)  
Customer's violation of this Agreement; or (5)  
Customer's violation of any rights of a third party.  
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION. THIS SECTION  
PROVIDES FOR THE RESOLUTION OF MOST  
DISPUTES OR CLAIMS THROUGH  
ARBITRATION INSTEAD OF COURT TRIALS  
AND CLASS ACTIONS. CUSTOMER SHOULD  
READ THIS SECTION CAREFULLY;  
ARBITRATION IS FINAL, BINDING AND  
SUBJECT TO ONLY VERY LIMITED REVIEW BY  
A COURT. THIS SECTION GOVERNING  
DISPUTES SHALL SURVIVE TERMINATION OF  
THIS AGREEMENT.  
ARBITRATE TO: SPRINT GENERAL COUNSEL,  
ARBITRATION OFFICE, 2001 EDMUND HALLEY  
DRIVE, RESTON, VIRGINIA 20191. BOTH  
PARTIES AGREE TO MAKE REASONABLE  
ATTEMPTS TO RESOLVE ANY SUCH DISPUTE;  
183  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
HOWEVER, IF THE PARTIES CANNOT  
THAT THE AAA APPOINT, IN ITS SOLE  
RESOLVE THE DISPUTE WITHIN FORTY-FIVE  
(45) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF NOTICE TO  
ARBITRATE, THEN AN ARBITRATION CLAIM  
MAY COMMENCE. ANY ARBITRATION  
DISCRETION, A NEUTRAL ARBITRATOR.  
CUSTOMER AND SPRINT FURTHER AGREE  
THAT NO ARBITRATOR SHALL HAVE THE  
AUTHORITY TO AWARD ANY RELIEF OR  
REMEDY IN EXCESS OF OR CONTRARY TO  
WHAT IS PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT,  
EXCEPT WHERE SUCH PROVISION IS NOT  
PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW. THE  
ARBITRATOR'S DECISION AND AWARD SHALL  
BE FINAL AND BINDING, AND JUDGMENT ON  
THE AWARD RENDERED BY THE ARBITRATOR  
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY COURT HAVING  
JURISDICTION. THE LAW THAT IS APPLIED TO  
THIS AGREEMENT ALSO SHALL BE APPLIED IN  
ANY ARBITRATION PROCEEDING. UNLESS  
THE CUSTOMER AND SPRINT OTHERWISE  
AGREE, ANY ARBITRATION SHALL BE  
INITIATED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL  
BE ADMINISTERED BY THE AMERICAN  
ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION (“AAA”) IN  
ACCORDANCE WITH ITS WIRELESS INDUSTRY  
ARBITRATION RULES (AND THE AAA  
SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR  
CONSUMER RELATED DISPUTES AS THEY  
MAY BE APPLICABLE), AS MODIFIED BY THIS  
AGREEMENT. INFORMATION CONCERNING  
THE AAA, ITS WIRELESS INDUSTRY  
ARBITRATION RULES AND OTHER  
INFORMATION CONCERNING ARBITRATION  
PROCEDURES AND FEES CAN BE FOUND BY  
CALLING THE AAA AT 1-800-778-7879 OR  
VISITING ITS WEBSITE AT http://www.adr.org.  
ANY ARBITRATION SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY  
A SINGLE NEUTRAL ARBITRATOR. CUSTOMER  
AND SPRINT SHALL COOPERATE IN GOOD  
FAITH TO SELECT THE ARBITRATOR WITHIN  
THIRTY (30) CALENDAR DAYS OF THE  
COMMENCEMENT OF ANY ARBITRATION  
PROCEEDING. IF CUSTOMER AND SPRINT  
CANNOT AGREE UPON A NEUTRAL  
CONDUCTED IN THE COUNTY SEAT OF THE  
COUNTY IN WHICH CUSTOMER'S BILLING  
ADDRESS IS LOCATED. ALL ADMINISTRATIVE  
COSTS AND FEES OF ARBITRATION SHALL BE  
BORNE EQUALLY BY CUSTOMER AND  
SPRINT, EXCEPT IF THE CLAIM IS LESS THAN  
$1000, CUSTOMER WILL BE OBLIGATED TO  
PAY ONLY $25. FOR CLAIMS OVER $1,000 BUT  
UNDER $75,000, CUSTOMER WILL BE  
REQUIRED TO PAY ITS SHARE OF  
ARBITRATION FEES, BUT NO MORE THAN THE  
EQUIVALENT COURT FILING FEE FOR A  
ARBITRATOR WITHIN THE THIRTY DAY  
PERIOD, THEN EITHER PARTY MAY REQUEST  
184  
COURT ACTION FILED IN THE JURISDICTION  
WHERE CUSTOMER'S BILLING ADDRESS IS  
LOCATED. CUSTOMER AND SPRINT SHALL  
EACH BEAR THE EXPENSES OF THEIR OWN  
COUNSEL, EXPERTS, WITNESSES AND THE  
PREPARATION AND PRESENTATION OF  
EVIDENCE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY  
ARBITRATION.  
CLAIM. IF FOR ANY REASON THE  
ARBITRATION CLAUSE SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT IS DEEMED INAPPLICABLE OR  
INVALID, OR TO THE EXTENT THE  
ARBITRATION CLAUSE ALLOWS FOR  
LITIGATION OF DISPUTES IN COURT,  
CUSTOMER AND SPRINT BOTH WAIVE, TO  
THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW,  
ANY RIGHT TO PURSUE OR PARTICIPATE AS  
A PLAINTIFF OR AS A CLASS MEMBER IN ANY  
CLAIM ON A CLASS OR CONSOLIDATED BASIS  
OR IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY.  
Waiver of Jury Trial and Class Actions. BY  
ENTERING INTO THIS AGREEMENT,  
CUSTOMER AND SPRINT ACKNOWLEDGE AND  
AGREE TO WAIVE CERTAIN RIGHTS TO  
LITIGATE DISPUTES IN COURT, TO RECEIVE A  
JURY TRIAL OR TO PARTICIPATE AS A  
PLAINTIFF OR AS A CLASS MEMBER IN ANY  
CLAIM ON A CLASS OR CONSOLIDATED BASIS  
OR IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY.  
CUSTOMER AND SPRINT BOTH AGREE THAT  
ANY ARBITRATION WILL BE CONDUCTED ON  
AN INDIVIDUAL AND NOT ON A  
17 MISCELLANEOUS.  
Assignment. Customer may not assign all or any  
part of this Agreement (including any of its rights  
and duties under the Agreement) or sell or lease  
the Service to others without Sprint's prior written  
consent. Sprint may assign all or any part of this  
Agreement to any successor or any other entity  
capable of performing Sprint's obligations under  
this Agreement without obtaining Customer's  
consent or providing notice to Customer. Sprint  
shall be released from all liability upon assignment  
of this Agreement. Customer shall continue to be  
bound by the terms of this Agreement following  
assignment.  
CONSOLIDATED, CLASS-WIDE OR  
REPRESENTATIVE BASIS AND THAT IF  
ARBITRATION IS NOT CONDUCTED ON AN  
INDIVIDUAL BASIS, THIS SECTION 16 SHALL  
BE DEEMED NULL AND VOID. THE  
ARBITRATOR MAY AWARD INJUNCTIVE  
RELIEF ONLY IN FAVOR OF THE INDIVIDUAL  
PARTY SEEKING RELIEF AND ONLY TO THE  
EXTENT NECESSARY TO PROVIDE RELIEF  
WARRANTED BY THAT PARTY'S INDIVIDUAL  
185  
Nextel National Network General Terms and Conditions  
Sprint Associates. Sprint's subsidiaries, affiliates  
and certain third party service providers (the  
“Sprint Associates”) may provide wireless  
communication services in support of Sprint from  
time to time. All rights and protections afforded to  
Sprint by this Agreement are also afforded to the  
Sprint Associates.  
Governing Law. The laws of the state associated  
with the area code assigned to Customer's Number  
will govern this Agreement, without regard to the  
conflict of laws rules of that state. This Agreement  
is also subject to applicable federal laws and  
federal or state regulations or tariffs  
Entire Agreement. This Agreement and the  
documents to which it refers (e.g., return policy,  
Plan Information and Payment Forms, to the extent  
such documentation may be applicable), form the  
entire Agreement between Customer and Sprint.  
There are no oral or written agreements between  
Customer and Sprint for Equipment or Service  
relating to the Nextel National Network other than  
as set forth in this Agreement. If Customer is a  
business, Sprint shall not be bound by the terms  
and conditions included in Customer's purchase  
orders or elsewhere, unless expressly agreed to in  
writing by a duly authorized officer of Sprint. If any  
provision of this Agreement is found to be illegal or  
otherwise invalid, the remainder of this Agreement  
will remain enforceable. If, at any time, Sprint fails  
to enforce any right or remedy under this  
Notice. Notice to Customer shall be considered  
delivered if sent by U.S. Mail addressed to the  
most current address on file for Customer  
(effective three (3) days following deposit in U.S.  
Mail) or by electronic means such as email or text  
messaging (effective immediately upon  
transmission). Written notice to Sprint must be  
sufficient to identify Customer and the Service and  
shall be considered delivered when directed to  
Sprint Customer Service department and received  
by Sprint. Oral and electronic notice to Sprint shall  
be considered delivered on the date reflected in  
Sprint's records. To ensure receipt of notice,  
Customer shall notify Sprint of any changes in  
Customer's email or mailing address.  
Agreement (including, but not limited to, a waiver of  
Sprint's right to written notice under the  
Agreement), Sprint shall retain the right to enforce  
such right or remedy at a later time.  
Limitation on Third Party Beneficiaries. This  
Agreement is not for the benefit of any third party  
other than the Sprint Associates.  
186  
United States Federal Communications  
Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47  
CFR part 2 sub-part J.  
Safety and General  
Information  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND  
EFFICIENT OPERATION.  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). C95. 1-1992.  
READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING  
YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE  
PORTABLE RADIO.  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing  
Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998.  
RF Operational  
Characteristics  
Your radio product contains a radio frequency  
transmitter to convey the information you wish to  
send as well as occasional automatic signals used  
to sustain connection to the wireless network, and  
a receiver which enables you to receive  
communication and connection information from  
the network.  
Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6.  
Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency  
Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range  
from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999.  
Australian Communications Authority  
Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic  
Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2003.  
ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution  
303 (July 2, 2002) “Regulation of the limitation of  
exposure to electrical, magnetic, and  
electromagnetic fields in the radio frequency  
range between 9 kHz and 300 GHz.”  
“Attachment to Resolution 303 from July 2,  
2002.”  
Portable Radio Product  
Operation and EME Exposure  
Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply  
with the following national and international  
standards and guidelines regarding exposure of  
human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic  
energy (EME):  
187  
         
Safety and General Information  
To assure optimal radio product performance  
and make sure human exposure to radio  
frequency electromagnetic energy is within the  
guidelines set forth in the above standards,  
always adhere to the following procedures:  
When using your radio product as a  
traditional two-way radio, hold the  
radio product in a vertical position  
with the microphone one to two  
inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the  
lips.  
Phone Operation  
Body-Worn Operation  
When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your  
radio product as you would a wireline telephone.  
Speak directly into the microphone.  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure  
guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your  
body when transmitting, always place the radio  
product in a Motorola approved clip, holder,  
holster, case or body harness for this product.  
Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may  
exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do  
not use a Motorola approved body-worn  
accessory and are not using the radio product  
in the intended use positions along side the  
head in the phone mode or in front of the face  
in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the  
antenna and the radio product are kept the  
following minimum distances from the body  
when transmitting  
Two-Way Radio Operation  
Your radio product has been designed and tested  
to comply with national and international standards  
and guidelines regarding human exposure to RF  
electromagnetic energy, when operated in the  
two-way mode (at the face, or at the abdomen  
when using an audio accessory) at usage factors  
of up to 50% talk/50% listen.  
Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50%  
of the time. To transmit (talk), push the  
Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls,  
release the PTT button. Transmitting 50% of the  
time or less, is important because this radio  
generates measurable RF energy only when  
transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards  
compliance).  
Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5  
cm)  
Data operation using any data feature with or  
without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5  
cm)  
188  
Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure  
ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5838 MEET THE  
GOVERNMENT’S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE  
TO RADIO WAVES.  
body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest  
SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the  
ear is 1.25 W/kg and when tested on the body, as  
described in this user guide, is 1.16 W/kg during packet  
data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ  
among phone models, depending upon available  
accessories and FCC requirements.)2  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It  
is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission  
limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by  
the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.  
Government. These limits are part of comprehensive  
guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for  
the general population. The guidelines are based on  
standards that were developed by independent scientific  
organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of  
scientific studies. The standards include a substantial  
safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons,  
regardless of age and health.  
While there may be differences between the SAR levels of  
various phones and at various positions, they all meet the  
government requirement for safe exposure.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this  
model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in  
compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR  
information on this model phone is on file with the FCC  
and can be found under the Display Grant section of  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID  
AZ489FT5838.  
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is  
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR)  
can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry  
Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com.  
1
1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard  
operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone  
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested  
frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the  
highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the  
phone while operating can be well below the maximum  
value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at  
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required  
to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.  
1 In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for  
mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg)  
averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard  
incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give  
additional protection for the public and to account for any  
variations in measurements.  
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it  
must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not  
exceed the limit established by the government-adopted  
requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in  
positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the  
2
The SAR information reported to the FCC includes the  
FCC-accepted Motorola testing protocol, assessment  
procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this  
product.  
189  
Safety and General Information  
Antenna Care  
Facilities  
Use only the supplied or an approved  
To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or  
compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in  
any facility where posted notices instruct you to do  
so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy.  
replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas,  
modifications, or attachments could damage the  
radio product and may violate FCC regulations.  
DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio  
product is “IN USE”. Holding the antenna affects  
call quality and may cause the radio product to  
operate at a higher power level than needed.  
Aircraft  
When instructed to do so, turn off your radio  
product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a  
radio product must be in accordance with  
Approved Accessories  
For a list of approved Motorola accessories call  
1-800-453-0920, or visit our website at  
www.motorola.com/iden.  
applicable regulations per airline crew instructions.  
Medical Devices  
Pacemakers  
Electromagnetic  
The Advanced Medical Technology Association  
(AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum  
separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained  
between a handheld wireless radio product and a  
pacemaker. These recommendations are  
consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration.  
Interference/Compatibility  
Note: Nearly every electronic device is  
susceptible to electromagnetic  
interference (EMI) if inadequately  
shielded, designed or otherwise  
configured for electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
Persons with pacemakers should:  
ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6  
inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the  
radio product is turned ON.  
190  
       
Operational Warnings  
Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket.  
Pull off the road and park before making or  
answering a call if driving conditions so require.  
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize  
the potential for interference.  
Operational Warnings  
Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you  
have any reason to suspect that interference is  
taking place.  
!
For Vehicles With an Air  
Bag  
Hearing Aids  
Do not place a portable radio product in the area  
over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area.  
Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio  
is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air  
bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled  
with great force and cause serious injury to  
occupants of the vehicle.  
Some digital wireless radio products may interfere  
with some hearing aids. In the event of such  
interference, you may want to consult your hearing  
aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical device,  
consult the manufacturer of your device to  
determine if it is adequately shielded from RF  
energy. Your physician may be able to assist you  
in obtaining this information.  
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres  
Turn off your radio product prior to entering any  
area with a potentially explosive atmosphere,  
unless it is a radio product type especially qualified  
for use in such areas as “Intrinsically Safe” (for  
example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved).  
Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such  
areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive  
Use While Driving  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio  
products in the area where you drive. Always obey  
them.  
atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire  
resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
When using the radio product while driving, please:  
Give full attention to driving and to the road.  
Use hands-free operation, if available.  
191  
 
Safety and General Information  
Note: The areas with potentially explosive  
atmospheres referred to above include  
fueling areas such as below decks on  
boats, fuel or chemical transfer or  
storage facilities, areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such  
as grain, dust or metal powders, and  
any other area where you would  
normally be advised to turn off your  
vehicle engine. Areas with potentially  
explosive atmospheres are often but  
not always posted.  
Operational Cautions  
!
Batteries  
All batteries can cause property damage and/or  
bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material  
such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches  
exposed terminals. The conductive material may  
complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and  
become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any  
charged battery, particularly when placing it inside  
a pocket, purse, or other container with metal  
objects. To reduce the risk of injury, batteries  
should not be exposed to fire, disassembled, or  
crushed.  
Blasting Caps and Areas  
To avoid possible interference with blasting  
operations, turn off your radio product when you  
are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area,  
or in areas posted: “Turn off two-way radio”. Obey  
all signs and instructions.  
Cleaning and Drying Considerations  
Using a leather carry case may help protect the  
surfaces and help prevent liquids (e.g., rain) from  
entering into the interior of the radio product. This  
product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to  
liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit.  
For Phones With Music Players  
Listening to music at high volumes over extended  
periods of time may be harmful to a user's hearing.  
User should take precautions to minimize this risk  
by moderating volume levels. If you experience  
ringing or other hearing-related discomfort, lower  
volume or discontinue use.  
If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not  
try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a  
dryer as this will damage the radio product and  
void the warranty. Instead, do the following:  
1 Immediately power off the radio product.  
192  
   
Accessory Safety Information  
2 Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped)  
Before using any battery or battery charger, read  
all the instructions for and cautionary markings  
on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which  
may include a separate wall-mounted power  
supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product  
using the battery.  
from radio product.  
3 Shake excess liquid from radio product.  
4 Place the radio product and battery in an area  
that is at room temperature and has good air  
flow.  
5 Let the radio product, battery, and SIM card dry  
for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery  
and/or powering on the radio product.  
Do not expose any battery charger to water,  
rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or  
in-vehicle use only.  
If the radio product does not work after following  
the steps listed above, contact your dealer for  
servicing information.  
Warning: To reduce the risk of injury,  
charge only the rechargeable  
!
batteries described in “Battery” on  
page 3. Other types of batteries may  
burst, causing personal injury and  
damage.  
Clean the external surfaces of the radio product  
with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of  
dishwashing detergent and water. Some  
household cleaners may contain chemicals that  
could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid  
the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners.  
Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio  
product.  
To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug,  
pull by the plug rather than the cord when you  
disconnect the battery charger from the power  
source outlet.  
Do not operate any battery charger with a  
damaged cord or plug — replace them  
immediately.  
Accessory Safety Information  
Important: Save these accessory safety  
instructions.  
Battery chargers may become warm during  
operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the  
touch, unplug it from the power outlet  
immediately and discontinue its use.  
193  
   
Safety and General Information  
Use of a non-recommended attachment to a  
battery charger may result in a risk of fire,  
electric shock, or injury to persons.  
Maximum ambient temperature around the  
power supply or transformer of any battery  
charger should not exceed 40°C (104°F).  
The output power from the power supply or  
transformer must not exceed the rating given  
on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger.  
The disconnection from the line voltage is  
made by unplugging the power supply from  
the AC receptacle.  
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any  
battery charger from the outlet before  
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.  
Make sure the battery charger power cord is  
located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped  
over, or subjected to damage or stress.  
An extension cord should not be used with any  
battery charger unless absolutely necessary.  
Use of an improper extension cord could result  
in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension  
cord must be used, make sure that:  
The pins on the plug of the extension cord are  
the same number, size, and shape as those  
on the plug of the charger.  
For optimum charging performance, turn off the  
radio product while charging it in any battery  
charger.  
The extension cord is properly wired and in  
good electrical condition.  
The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100  
feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet.  
Do not operate any battery charger if it has  
received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or  
has been damaged in any way; take it to a  
qualified service technician.  
Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it  
to a qualified service technician when service  
or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly  
may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.  
194  
“M” Rating: Mobile phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC  
requirements for hearing aid compatibility and are  
likely to generate less interference to hearing devices  
than phones that are not labeled. (M4 is the “better” or  
higher of the two ratings.)  
Hearing Aid  
Compatibility  
When some mobile phones are used with certain  
hearing devices (including hearing aids and cochlear  
implants), users may detect a noise which can  
interfere with the effectiveness of the hearing device.  
“T” Rating: Mobile phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements for compatibility with telecoil-type (“T  
Switch” or “Telephone Switch”) hearing devices and  
are likely to be more usable with such hearing devices  
than unrated phones. (T4 is the “better” or higher of  
the two ratings.)  
Some hearing devices are more “immune” than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile phones can also  
vary in the amount of interference noise they may  
generate at any given time. ANSI standard C63.19  
was developed to provide a standardized means of  
measuring both mobile phone and hearing devices to  
determine usability rating categories for both.  
Hearing devices may also be measured for immunity  
to interference noise from mobile phones. In some  
cases, hearing devices can be modified or “hardened”  
to improve operation with a mobile phone. Your  
hearing device manufacturer or hearing health  
professional may help you improve the interaction of  
your mobile phone and hearing device. Not all hearing  
devices are rated for compatibility with mobile phones,  
but hearing devices that are rated should have the  
rating available. Be sure to evaluate your personal  
needs by trying out this mobile phone with your  
specific hearing device, using both antenna positions if  
this mobile phone is equipped with a retractable  
antenna.  
Ratings have been developed for mobile phones to  
assist hearing device users find phones that may be  
compatible with their particular hearing device. Not all  
mobile phones are rated for compatibility with hearing  
devices, but mobile phones that are rated should have  
the rating available. This rating may depend on the  
position of a retractable antenna.  
Results will vary depending on the user’s hearing  
device and individual type and degree of hearing loss.  
If a hearing device is particularly vulnerable to  
interference noise, even a mobile phone with a higher  
rating may still cause unacceptable noise levels in the  
hearing device. Evaluate your personal needs by  
trying out the mobile phone with your hearing device.  
More information about hearing aid compatibility may  
be found at:  
http://commerce.motorola.com/consumer/QWhtml/acc  
essibility/default.html (www.motorola.com),  
www.fcc.gov, www.fda.gov, and  
www.accesswireless.org.  
195  
   
Caring for the Environment by Recycling  
more details. If no suitable scheme exists, you  
may return unwanted mobile telephones and  
electrical accessories to any Motorola Approved  
Service Centre in your region.  
Caring for the  
Environment  
by Recycling  
This symbol on a Motorola product means the  
product should not be disposed of with household  
waste.  
Disposal of Your Mobile  
Telephone and Accessories  
Please do not dispose of mobile telephones or  
electrical accessories, such as chargers or  
headsets, with your household waste. In some  
countries or regions, collection systems have been  
set up to handle waste electrical and electronic  
items. Please contact your regional authorities for  
196  
   
MOTOROLA LIMITED  
WARRANTY  
PRODUCTS  
COVERED  
LENGTH OF  
COVERAGE  
Note: FOR IDEN SUBSCRIBER PRODUCTS,  
ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE  
PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES  
OR CANADA  
Products as defined  
above.  
One (1) year from the  
date of purchase by the  
first consumer  
purchaser of the  
product.  
What Does this Warranty Cover?  
Subject to the exclusions contained below,  
Motorola, Inc. warrants its Motorola iDEN Digital  
Mobile and Portable Handsets (“Products”),  
Motorola-branded or certified accessories sold for  
use with these Products (“Accessories”) and  
Motorola software contained on CD-Roms or other  
tangible media and sold for use with these  
Products (“Software”) to be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship under normal  
consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below.  
This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive  
remedy, and applies as follows to new  
Products, Accessories and Software  
Accessories as  
defined above.  
One (1) year from the  
date of purchase by the  
first consumer  
purchaser of the  
product.  
Products or  
The balance of the  
Accessories that are original warranty or  
Repaired or Replaced. for ninety (90) days  
from the date returned  
to the consumer,  
whichever is longer.  
Software as defined  
Ninety (90) days from  
purchased by consumers in the United States  
or Canada, which are accompanied by this  
written warranty:  
above. Applies only to the date of purchase.  
physical defects in the  
media that embodies  
the copy of the software  
(e.g. CD-ROM, or  
floppy disk).  
197  
 
MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY  
What is not covered? (Exclusions)  
Use of Non-Motorola Products and  
Accessories. Defects or damage that result from  
the use of Non-Motorola branded or certified  
Products, Accessories, Software or other  
peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage.  
Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance,  
repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear  
and tear are excluded from coverage.  
Ornamental Decorations. Ornamental  
decorations such as emblems, graphics,  
rhinestones, jewels, gemstones and their settings,  
and other decorative elements, are excluded from  
coverage.  
Unauthorized Service or Modification. Defects  
or damages resulting from service, testing,  
adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration,  
including without limitation, software changes, or  
modification in any way by someone other than  
Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged  
capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and  
batteries that leak are covered by this limited  
warranty.  
Altered Products. Products or Accessories with  
(a) serial numbers or date tags that have been  
removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or  
that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched  
board serial numbers; or (d) nonconforming or  
non-Motorola housings, antennas, or parts, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result  
from: (a) improper operation, storage, misuse or  
abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical  
damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of  
the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with  
liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy  
perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or  
food; (c) use of the Products or Accessories for  
commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or  
Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d)  
other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Communication Services. Defects, damages, or  
the failure of Products, Accessories or Software  
due to any communication service or signal you  
may subscribe to or use with the Products,  
Accessories or Software is excluded from  
coverage.  
198  
Software Embodied in Physical Media. No  
warranty is made that the software will meet your  
requirements or will work in combination with any  
hardware or software applications provided by third  
parties, that the operation of the software products  
will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects  
in the software products will be corrected.  
How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other  
Information? To obtain service or information,  
please call:  
Motorola iDEN Customer Services  
1-800-453-0920 or 954-723-4910  
TTY-877-483-2840  
Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media.  
Software that is not embodied in physical media  
(e.g. software that is downloaded from the  
Or visit us online at  
http://www.motorola.com/iden/support  
You will receive instructions on how to ship the  
Products, Accessories or Software, at your  
expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center.  
To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of  
your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof  
of purchase; (b) a written description of the  
problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if  
applicable; (d) the name and location of the  
installation facility (if applicable) and, most  
importantly; (e) your address and telephone  
number.  
internet), is provided “as is” and without warranty.  
Who is covered? This warranty extends only to  
the first consumer purchaser, and is not  
transferable.  
What will Motorola Do? Motorola, at its option,  
will at no charge repair, replace or refund the  
purchase price of any Products, Accessories or  
Software that does not conform to this warranty.  
We may use functionally equivalent  
reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new  
Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software  
or applications added to your Product, Accessory  
or Software, including but not limited to personal  
contacts, games and ringer tones, will be  
reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software  
and applications please create a back up prior to  
requesting service.  
What Other Limitations Are There? ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED  
TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR,  
REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED  
UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS  
199  
MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY  
THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE  
Laws in the United States and other countries  
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for  
copyrighted Motorola software such as the  
exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies  
of the Motorola software. Motorola software may  
only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with,  
the Products associated with such Motorola  
software. No other use, including without limitation  
disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise  
of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is  
permitted.  
CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF  
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OF  
IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE  
LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE  
PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR  
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR  
LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF  
BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA,  
SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER  
FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY  
TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR  
SOFTWARE TO THE FULL EXTENT THESE  
DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
Patent and Software  
Provisions  
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any  
suit brought against the end user purchaser to the  
extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or  
parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola  
will pay those costs and damages finally awarded  
against the end user purchaser in any such suit  
which are attributable to any such claim, but such  
defense and payments are conditioned on the  
following:  
Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the  
limitation or exclusion of incidental or  
consequential damages, or limitation on the  
length of an implied warranty, so the above  
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights,  
and you may also have other rights that vary  
from state to state or from one jurisdiction to  
another.  
a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in  
writing by such purchaser of any notice of such  
claim;  
200  
 
Patent and Software Provisions  
b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the  
defense of such suit and all negotiations for its  
settlement or compromise; and  
Laws in the United States and other countries  
preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights  
for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the  
exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and  
distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software.  
MOTOROLA software may be used in only the  
Product in which the software was originally  
embodied and such software in such Product may  
not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in  
any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof.  
No other use including, without limitation,  
c. Should the Product or parts become, or in  
MOTOROLA'S opinion be likely to become, the  
subject of a claim of infringement of a United  
States patent, that such purchaser will permit  
MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either  
to procure for such purchaser the right to  
continue using the Product or parts or to  
replace or modify the same so that it becomes  
non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a  
credit for the Product or parts as depreciated  
and accept its return. The depreciation will be  
an equal amount per year over the lifetime of  
the Product or parts as established by  
MOTOROLA.  
alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution,  
or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA  
software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA  
software is permitted. No license is granted by  
implication, estoppel or otherwise under  
MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.  
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to  
any claim of patent infringement which is based  
upon the combination of the Product or parts  
furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or  
devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will  
MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of  
ancillary equipment or software not furnished by  
MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in  
connection with the Product or any parts thereof.  
201  
Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International)  
Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the  
Limited Warranty  
Motorola  
applicable warranty period if:  
a. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity, or  
Communication  
Products (International)  
b. the battery develops leakage.  
MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either  
repair the Product (with new or reconditioned  
parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned  
Product), or refund the purchase price of the  
Product during the warranty period provided it is  
returned in accordance with the terms of this  
warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted  
for the balance of the original applicable warranty  
period. All replaced parts of Product shall become  
the property of MOTOROLA.  
Note: This Warranty applies in Singapore and  
the Philippines.  
I. What This Warranty Covers  
and For How Long:  
MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA  
manufactured iDEN Communication Products  
listed below (“Product”) against defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service  
for a period of time from the date of purchase as  
scheduled below:  
This express limited warranty is extended by  
MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser  
only and is not assignable or transferable to any  
other party. This is the complete warranty for the  
Product manufactured by MOTOROLA.  
MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for  
additions or modifications to this warranty unless  
made in writing and signed by an officer of  
MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate  
agreement between MOTOROLA and the original  
end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant  
the installation, maintenance or service of the  
Product.  
iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and One (1) Year  
Portable Units  
Product Accessories  
(manufactured by or under license  
from MOTOROLA)  
One (1) Year  
Batteries  
One (1) Year  
202  
 
Patent and Software Provisions  
MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for  
any ancillary equipment not furnished by  
MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in  
connection with the Product, or for operation of the  
Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such  
equipment if expressly excluded from this  
warranty. Because each system which may use  
the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims  
liability for range, coverage, or operation of the  
system as a whole, or any portion of the system not  
produced by MOTOROLA, under this warranty.  
TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,  
LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR  
INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE  
FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY  
LAW.  
III. How to Get Warranty  
Service:  
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the  
date of purchase and Product item serial number)  
in order to receive warranty service and, also,  
deliver or send the Product item, transportation  
and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty  
service location. Warranty service will be provided  
by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized  
warranty service locations. If you first contact the  
company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer  
or communication service provider), it can facilitate  
your obtaining warranty service.  
II. General Provisions:  
This warranty sets forth the full extent of  
MOTOROLA’S responsibilities regarding the  
Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the  
purchase price, at MOTOROLA’S options, is the  
exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN  
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS  
WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE  
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY  
BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE  
PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF  
IV. What This Warranty Does  
Not Cover:  
a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the  
Product in other than its normal and customary  
manner.  
203  
Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International)  
b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident,  
water, or neglect.  
MOTOROLA’S published specifications or the  
local type acceptance labeling in effect for the  
Product at the time the Product was initially  
distributed from MOTOROLA.  
c. Defects or damage from improper testing,  
operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,  
modification, or adjustment.  
d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless  
caused directly by defects in material  
workmanship.  
j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to  
Product surfaces that does not effect the  
operation of the Product.  
k. Normal and customary wear and tear.  
e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product  
modifications, disassemblies or repairs  
(including, without limitation, the audition to the  
Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied  
equipment).  
l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from  
use of the products in connection with  
non-MOTOROLA equipment.  
V. Patent and Software  
Provisions:  
f. Product which has had the serial number  
removed or made illegible.  
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any  
suit brought against the end user purchaser to the  
extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or  
parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those  
costs and damages finally awarded against the  
end user purchaser in any such suit which are  
attributable to any such claim, but such defense  
and payments are conditioned on the following:  
g. Rechargeable batteries if:  
1.Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of  
cells are broken or show evidence of  
tampering.  
2.The damage or defect is caused by  
charging or using the battery in equipment  
or service other than the Product for which it  
is specified.  
a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in  
writing by such purchaser of any notice of such  
claim;  
h. Freight costs to the repair depot.  
i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized  
alteration of the software/firmware in the  
Product, does not function in accordance with  
204  
Patent and Software Provisions  
b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the  
defense of such suit and all negotiations for its  
settlement or compromise; and  
Laws in the United States and other countries  
preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights  
for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the  
exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and  
distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software.  
MOTOROLA software may be used in only the  
Product in which the software was originally  
embodied and such software in such Product may  
not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in  
any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof.  
No other use including, without limitation,  
c. Should the Product or parts become, or in  
MOTOROLA'S opinion be likely to become, the  
subject of a claim of infringement of a patent,  
that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA,  
at its option and expense, either to procure for  
such purchaser the right to continue using the  
Product or parts or to replace or modify the  
same so that it becomes non-infringing or to  
grant such purchaser a credit for the Product  
or parts as depreciated and accept its return.  
The depreciation will be an equal amount per  
year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as  
established by MOTOROLA.  
alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution,  
or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA  
software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA  
software is permitted. No license is granted by  
implication, estoppel or otherwise under  
MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.  
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to  
any claim of patent infringement which is based  
upon the combination of the Product or parts  
furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or  
devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will  
MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of  
ancillary equipment or software not furnished by  
MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in  
connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In  
no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any  
incidental, special or consequential damages  
arising from any claim of patent infringement or  
alleged infringement.  
205  
access settings 113  
access settings, editing 118  
accessing 114  
setting device details 117  
setting voice dialing 114  
setting your phone 113  
status icons 12  
Index  
Numerics  
Airplane mode 149  
3-way calling 54  
bonds 113, 115  
storing received items 120  
transfers, canceling 119  
turning on or off 114  
A
connections, making 115  
deleting received items 120  
device details 117  
device names, editing 118  
devices, deleting 118  
devices, disconnecting 117  
devices, discovering 115,  
117  
discoverable mode 115  
during an active call 117  
headset 161  
icons 10  
PINs 116  
reassigning a device name  
114  
receiving items 119  
sending Contacts 118  
sending Datebook events  
119  
Accessories 17  
safety 193  
Antenna 17  
Attachments 86  
viewing received items 120  
C
Call alerts 32  
see also MMS messages,  
attachments  
deleting 33  
queue 32  
receiving 32  
responding 32, 33  
sending 32  
Audio recordings 103  
playing 103  
B
Backlight 148, 149  
Java applications 148  
Battery  
sorting 33  
viewing 33  
Call filtering 157  
Call forwarding 51  
all calls 51  
missed calls 52  
off 51  
Call Timers 56  
Call Waiting 53  
care 5  
charging 4  
door 2  
inserting 3  
safety 192  
Baud rate 153  
Bluetooth 113  
sending pictures 119  
206  
 
off 53  
Calls  
TTY, see TTY calls  
Turbo Dial 29  
voice name 28  
Walkie-Talkie 55, 151  
Circuit data 58  
Clock 150  
Contact information  
receiving 35, 110  
sending 108  
showing only Group  
Walkie-Talkie 46  
showing only Walkie-Talkie  
46  
SIM card 41  
storing from Memo 50  
storing from MMS messages  
89  
storing from recent calls 36  
type 41  
voice name 44  
3-way 54  
answering automatically 150  
answering with any key 27,  
150  
emergency 30  
ending 27, 28  
entering number 28  
from memo 50  
from MMS messages 88  
from recent calls 37  
from SMS messages 95  
Group 22  
Group Walkie-Talkie 151  
international 55  
making 20  
on hold 54  
phone calls 20  
receiving 27  
redialing 29, 150  
remote Walkie-Talkie 161  
Speed Dial 29  
Contacts 41  
accessing 42  
addressing MMS messages  
81  
Customer Service 19  
D
capacity 47  
Data transfers 58  
Datebook 139  
copying events 142  
creating events 140  
deleting events 142  
editing events 142  
profiles 142  
creating entries 42  
creating MMS messages 80  
deleting 46  
editing entries 44  
icons 41  
international numbers 48  
pictures 41, 43, 46, 102  
ring tones 41, 43  
searching 46  
reminders 143  
setting up 144  
viewing 139  
Talkgroup 25  
showing all entries 46  
DC/GC Options 151  
207  
Index  
see also Walkie-Talkie calls,  
sending 58  
removing members 23  
sending with Nextel Direct  
Send 25  
settings 151  
starting with Walkie-Talkie  
Numbers 23  
Group Walkie-Talkie calls,  
and call alerts  
G
Dialing codes  
GPS Enabled 130  
almanac data 135  
best results 134  
emergency calls 30, 132  
map software 137  
privacy options 136  
security 136  
viewing location 133  
GPS PIN 152  
GPS, see GPS Enabled  
Group Walkie-Talkie  
settings 151  
non-emergency numbers 60  
telecommunications relay  
service 60  
status icons 11  
storing faster 24  
Display  
backlight 148, 149  
contrast 148, 150  
options 9  
H
Handset, see phone  
Headset 161  
Hearing Aid Compatibility 195  
Holster 5  
screen 8  
Sleep mode 5, 150  
Drafts 75, 84  
I
see also MMS messages,  
drafts  
icons 84  
Icons  
Groups  
Bluetooth 10, 12  
Contacts 41  
drafts 84  
Groups 11, 24  
Inbox 87  
sent items 85  
status 11  
text entry 38  
voice records 121  
DTMF dialing 115, 151  
adding members 22  
call information 24  
calls 22  
creating 22  
deleting 23  
icons 24  
making calls 22  
receiving calls 23  
E
Email 42, 43, 58, 75, 89  
Emergency calls 30  
End key 1  
F
Faxes  
208  
Idle screen 8  
creating MMS messages 80  
Inbox 75, 87  
forward locked 101  
locking 104  
memory 105  
pictures 102  
see also messages  
MMS messages 87  
Message notifications 67  
setting options 67  
icons 87  
International numbers 55  
calling 55  
renaming 104  
viewing 100  
Memo 50  
Messages 66  
see also voice mail, MMS  
messages, SMS  
messages, and Net alerts  
reading 95  
receiving 67  
storing 48  
calling from 50  
creating 50  
editing 50  
storing to Contacts 50  
viewing 50  
J
Java applications  
backlight 148  
deleting 125  
memory 126  
MMS messages 75  
attachments 86, 90  
calling from 88  
creating 75  
Memory  
K
Java applications 126  
media center 105  
MMS messages 66, 94  
ring tones 65  
Keypad 1  
deleting 85, 88, 93, 94  
drafts 84  
embedded objects 86  
forwarding 85, 88  
going to website 90  
Inbox 87  
locking 16, 152  
L
Language 150  
Lists, see menus  
voice records 123  
Menu key 1, 9  
Menus 9  
M
locking 88  
context-sensitive 1, 9  
groups 22  
main menu 10  
Media center 100  
audio recordings 103  
creating MMS messages 80  
deleting 104  
memory 66, 94  
message center 87  
quick notes 82, 92  
receiving 86  
Message center 67, 69  
209  
Index  
replying 88  
Groups 25  
102  
sending 75, 84, 85  
sent items 85  
setting up 91  
slide shows 86, 91  
storing to Contacts 89  
Pictures 106  
Non-emergency numbers 60  
receiving 107  
recent calls 36  
saving from messages 90  
sending 106  
O
One Touch Walkie-Talkie 55  
Profiles 154  
P
Modem  
call filtering 157  
changing settings 154  
creating 156  
Datebook 142  
deleting 156  
data transfer modes 58  
using your phone 57  
with a data cable 57  
with Bluetooth 58  
Multimedia messages, see MMS  
Mute 30  
Packet data 58  
Passwords 152  
voicemail 71  
Pauses  
dialing 55  
storing 47  
editing 156  
switching 154  
temporary 155  
viewing 154  
My Info 111  
Phone 1, 8  
editing 111  
active line 150  
locking 152  
modem 57  
off 6  
on 6  
receiving 34, 110  
sending 108, 112  
viewing 111  
PUK code 14  
Q
Quick notes 82, 92  
N
see also MMS messages,  
quick notes  
setting up 2  
Pictures 102  
Contacts 41, 43, 46, 102  
deleting from messages 90  
inserting in messages 82,  
Navigation key 1  
Nextel  
Customer Service 19  
Wireless data services 97  
Nextel Direct Send  
R
Radio frequency 187  
Recent calls 34, 37  
addressing MMS messages  
210  
81  
accessory 193  
changing 14  
call alerts 34  
battery 192  
electromagnetic interference  
190  
requirement 13  
unblocking 14  
Slide shows  
see MMS messages, slide  
shows  
SMS messages 95  
calling from 95  
Speakerphone 29  
Speed Dial 29, 42, 44  
Status light 150  
contact information 35  
creating MMS messages 80  
deleting 36  
display time 153  
pictures 36  
medical devices 190  
radio frequency 187  
Security 152  
Send key 1  
Sent items 75, 85  
storing to Contacts 36  
viewing 35  
see also MMS messages,  
sent items  
icons 85  
Redialing 29, 150  
Ring tones 63  
deleting 65  
Status messages 19  
Service, activating 6  
Settings 149  
resetting 153  
Shortcuts  
downloading 65  
in Contacts 41, 43, 64  
memory 65  
off 63  
setting 63  
T
T9 Text Input, see text entry  
Talkgroup 26  
Talkgroups 25, 26  
calls 25  
creating 159  
deleting 160  
editing 160  
vibrate 63  
definition 25  
Groups versus Talkgroups  
21  
joining 26  
receiving calls 27  
settings 151  
viewing assigned 64  
Ringer 146  
using 159  
SIM card 3, 13, 15  
Contacts 41  
inserting 15  
removing 16  
SIM PIN 13, 152  
see also Ring tones  
off 146  
S
turning off calls 27  
Safety 187  
211  
Index  
TDD/TTY devices 60  
Telecommunications relay  
service 60  
creating 44  
Voice records 121  
creating 121  
Walkie-Talkie  
One Touch 55  
settings 151  
Text and numeric messages  
see SMS messages  
Text display area 9  
Text entry 38  
deleting 123  
icons 121  
labelling 122  
locking 122  
memory 123  
playing 122  
Walkie-Talkie number  
and Groups 23  
receiving 7  
Wallpaper 103, 147  
Wireless data plan  
availability 97  
database 38, 39  
icons 38  
mode 38  
Word mode 38  
Themes 146  
Transmitters 6, 12, 149  
power button 6  
turning on and off 149  
TTY calls 58  
viewing 121  
Voicemail 69  
Wireless data services 97  
accessing 97  
changing password 71  
greetings 72  
group lists 74  
message forwarding 74  
playing messages 70  
receiving 69  
address book 97  
demos 99  
downloads 97  
guides 99  
instant messaging 97  
MMS 97  
baud rate 59  
making 58  
mode 59  
on 59  
sending calls to 27, 69  
setting up 7, 70  
Volume, setting 146, 152  
mobile email 97  
navigating 98  
ordering plan 97  
web service 97  
Word mode 38  
TTY devices 60  
Turbo Dial 29  
W
Waits  
V
dialing 55  
storing 47  
Voice name 28, 42  
212  

NEC Electronics America Cell Phone 241716 User Manual
Kuppersbusch USA EKV 68000 M User Manual
Kenwood CD RECEIVER KDC 126 User Manual
Kalorik USK TKM 1 User Manual
Giant Coffeemaker LP121HT User Manual
Fujitsu MAS3367 User Manual
Franke Consumer Products W9223028 User Manual
Emerson CKS2862 User Manual
Echo Bear Cat 76824 User Manual
Echo Bear Cat 72928 User Manual